Home

Roland KF-7 User's Manual

Contents

1. sss 128 Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song 128 Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure 129 Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles 130 Creating Original Styles User Styles 130 Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style Composer sss 130 Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style Converter sse 132 Saving a WSer SIVle saiisine anaa aeng eag NAN E 135 Deleting Saved User Styles sss 136 Copying Styles on Disks to the User Memory 137 Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to Disks 137 Chapter 8 Various Settings 138 Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano 138 Procedure tempi DERE 138 Adjusting Resonance Resonance sssss 138 Changing the Tuning Tuning sss 139 Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According to the Force Used to Play the Keys Hammer Response 140 Adjusting the Resonant Sounds String Resonance 140 Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Key Touch 141 Changing the Settings for One Touch Arranger 141 Proe d re utente tee tie rete iere estet Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point Changing MusicStyles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One To
2. esses 111 Count In settings screen sse 80 Countdown settings screen ssseeeeeeeeee 56 Delete Song Screen aa saa sak na aa naa a KANG Nga Na a 104 DeleteStyle screen 2 agak aaa naa kag eee neta 136 Delete User Program screen esee 110 Effect soreen rsrsr osista eee e HE ANANE KAGAN 32 Equalizer screen edenda 30 Functions SCTeen 2 2 4c eee eee eee eene 147 Genre Selection screen cccessscecesseceeeeecesseceeeseeeeenaes 65 Load User Program screen sese 110 Marker screen 1 nre E NAN E A Re erii 82 Melody Intelligence screen eee 60 Metronome screen esent 40 MIDI Setting Screen sese 155 Part Balance screen sasa akasa nga gana saka aga nana n 63 Piano Screen 5 cie iecit iet TEN aa Ag E 19 20 Program Change Screen sese 155 Rec Mode screen essseeseeeeeeeeee ennt nennen 117 Rename screen ssseseessesssesesserrersesrrrressssese 102 107 135 Revetb screen ii edle etti e ae ED naa ngak n 27 Rhythm screen sosio panapa a AN ng aaa eee ee 44 Save Song screen irin sisan anganaki anakan noka genap aneh 101 Save Style Senen isian anaa daana AAN AA ah egt 135 Save User Program screen eee 109 Score Scree a aaa naa gak aa gan aaa ist tire kana 70 Song Edit Screen sasasi orini i GAE aa ends 121 Song File screen 5 osito 100 Song Search screen scessssescssnsevercerssevsrssenseverenense
3. seen 85 Troubleshooting ossei aeee iiei eerte enn 161 TUNING asana saga gaga kaga NAN NA aba ba Kan aa akak a aaa edite etel 139 T unibg Cukve cst erdt dete ee Aan aaa sak a an akah 139 Tto ied redd eet Rake he aana aga anaa a ode 74 T tor scteen eite etu AG gga a aaa nanak 74 Tx Channel sa akang banana anana a a aan eis 156 U Undo Song Edit e eene eee 122 User EUnCtions onsite certe eU p eve reae ene eee eun 143 User Image Display eere 149 User Memory a naa gan ga nba a beta acti iieri 135 Formatting once come eue 151 User Program ed tetuer 107 Calling Up sasadan sasanga E kaanan ga kna naa aan 108 COPYING asas saa ank akadas aka ad thls ot n a a agan naak 111 Deleting ss andhana aa a neh ails a a aa A A aa AB Da ens 110 Loading a eos nen Ces 110 R eisteritig saji setae de cot eben eet best 107 Saving recite oie eth oi os Re deor aded 109 Switch 2 5 iae annie ie TA HU YANA 108 Transmitting PC Numbers eee 112 User5tyle ie eecueLeneenmusselsss 51 130 Copylngsciiboefonqe e ed hag 137 Deleting zu iin een RERO 136 Saving raaa a aa naa Nga eniin ai aka naa aaa 135 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start V VartiatiOn 5 eire rese fere tio eee ini daga er ee ees fenes 46 Variation buttons sist ree tre epe eee tu 57 Vocal Coutit Ina 1n see teet estie a naa 37 Vocal Effect eiie tiet ipi ree des Erano een t aa ang naa ga 33 Vocal Effect button ess
4. Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm 16 BeatS 4 4 2 Parts p 123 Rock 3 4 4 2 Rock 4 4 4 2 Pattern Name Beat Measures soins March 2 2 2 BD 2 Swing 2 2 8 di uda 2 Stick 0 4 1 MENTIS 2 March 2 4 2 S88 4 Country 2 4 8 Ballad 9 6 cs Samba 2 4 4 Maret 7 Waltz 1 3 4 4 Swing 6 8 a Waltz 2 3 4 F 6 8Simple 6 8 2 Waltz 3 3 4 1 9 8 9 8 2 CntryWltz 3 4 2 12 8 12 8 2 Gospel 3 4 F Countin1 4 4 2 JazzWaltz 3 4 4 CountIn2 3 4 2 3 4 Simple 3 4 1 C InSwing 4 4 1 8 Beati 4 4 5 Fill Int 4 4 1 8 Boat2 4 4 Fill In2 4 4 1 8 Best3t4 4 Fill In3 4 4 1 16 Beat 4 4 2 Ending 1 4 4 1 16 Beat2 4 4 2 Ending 2 44 1 16 Beat3 4 4 4 Ending SIWA 1 Rock 1 4 4 2 Rock 2 4 4 2 Swing 1 4 4 4 Swing 2 4 4 1 Shuffle1 4 4 2 179 5 6 5 2 8 un un S D c 7 Q Q E Parameters Stored to Internal Memory Parameters Stored in the User Program Saving Performance Settings User Program p 107 Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro gram name is touched when Option on the User Pro gram screen is set to Delayed Parameters Stored in Memory Backup Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup p 150 Tone Octave Shift Effects On Off Type Depth Parameters Rotary effect Slow Fast Organ Footage Upper Lower Percussion Selected Ri
5. Changing an Extracted Part p 134 Creating songs 1 Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 65 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 3 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears Touch lt Style Converter gt If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected the message Please select a song appears Use the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song p 65 then start the procedure again Ifa User Style has already been recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule Touch Cancel to return to the Menu screen Please save the User Style on a floppy disk or in the internal memory p 135 When you touch OK the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created A Style Converter screen like the one shown appears Parameter Settings Content Name Conv Mode Switches the mode Auto Manual Chord Root Chord root for the segment to be extracted Chord type for the segment to be Chord Type extracted major minor seventh Division Division From Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be extracted For Number of measures extracted Making the settings 4 Touch lt Conv Mod
6. Copy destination measure number To When End is selected the data is copied to the end of the song Times Number of times the data is to be copied Dst Copy destination part number Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Item Content E Correcting Timing Discrepancies Quantize You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded Data can be copied in the following three ways Replace If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination this previous recording is erased performance by automatically aligning the music with the timing you specify This is called Quantizing and the copied data is written in its place As an example let s say that the timing of some quarter Mix notes in a performance is a little off In this case you can If there is a performance recorded at the copy quantize the performance with quarter note timing thus Mode destination the copied data is layered over the making the timing accurate previous recording If the Tones used for the copy source and copy destination are different Example Quarter note resolution the copy destination Tone is used i J J Aciual note data Insert 1 If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination the copied portion is inserted with out erasing the previous recording The song is lengthened by the number of inserted mea sures B Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Pa
7. Recording Your Performance 3 4 Once you are able to play the song try recording your own performance Touch Rec When the Message screen appears touch Close Touch 6 on the screen You ll hear a count and recording begins Play along with the accompaniment Checking Your Performance 5 6 Compare your recorded performance with the example Touch Check When the Message screen appears touch Close Touch amp gt on the screen The Check screen display compares the example performance with your own performance Analyze and practice any trouble spots O 3 Changing the practice settings Immediately after turning on the power all measures are set for practice at the original tempo In the beginning you ll probably want to select specific phrases and practice that material repeatedly at a slower tempo Touch Options A screen like the one shown below appears vb When the Transpose function p 85 is set to ON the original tone is sounded when you touch notes or One Note on the screen MEMD Changing the Performance Played Back in the Check Screen You can switch the performance that is played back by touching the score for User or Reference in the Check screen When the keyboard is displayed in the Check screen touch lt User gt or lt Reference gt to switch the performance to be played back 75 Chapter
8. When you touch the character icon the character is input where at the position When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through anu English upper case English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch Del the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch Ins a space is inserted at the cursor position When you have finished inputting the characters touch Execute Never turn off the power while the display indicates Executing Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable gt If you touch lt All Clear at the bottom of the screen and then touch Execute the display reverts to the screen that normally appears when you turn on the power to the instrument Chapter 8 Various Settings B Selecting Images To Be Shown on O Image data that KF 7 can display the KF 7 User Image Display You can have image data from computers and other devices Size 320 x 240 pixels shown on the onboard display Color 1 bit 2 colors AtStep 3 in Procedure p 147 touch User Image BMP format Display Format T
9. ij m refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 142 Acoustic Bass Grand Piano 1 1 At the Basic screen touch lt Split gt J 108 New Song Acoustic Bs rand Pianol MEMO When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt lyrics gt appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics Split The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right hand section of the keyboard and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left hand section of the keyboard Here the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the right hand tone and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the left hand MEMO tone When you touch Octave lt gt lt gt in the tone selection Changing the Tones screen the pitch of the keyboard s sound is changed 2 Touch the name of the tone to be changed in octave units To learn more The tone name will be highlighted in white see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave 3 Press a Tone button to select the tone p 21 Shift p 26 4 1 When you have selected the tone touch Exit vb The display returns to the Basic screen You can change the volume Cancelling the Split balance between the left and right hand parts of the 5 Touch Split keyboard refer to Adjusting the Vo
10. symbols then back to English upper case When you touch Del the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch Ins a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name touch Exit Determining the save destination 6 Touch Disk or User Touch Disk if you are saving to a floppy disk touch User if you are saving to user memory Touch to select the save destination User Program number If a User Program set name is displayed a User Program set saved to that saved to that number is already If you select a number with previously saved User Program set data then save a new set of data to that same number the older User Program set will be deleted If you don t want to lose any previously saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name Save 8 Touch Save to begin the save Touch Exit to return to the User Program File screen Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable When clearing the set of saved User Programs refer to Deleting Saved User Program Sets p 110 e 2 ij ul 109 Chapter 5 User Program Registration B Loading Saved User Program Sets User Programs that have been saved on floppy
11. 4 Touch Copy A Copy Style screen like the following appears Exe Con Style mE Mp Specifying the copy source 5 Touch Disk to select the Style you want to copy When All is selected all of the Styles on the disk are copied to user memory Specifying the Copy Destination 6 Touch User for the Style to select the copy destination If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved Style and then copy to that number the previously saved Style is deleted If you do not want to lose the Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name 7 Touch Execute Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive before the copy is finished The Style on the disk is copied to user memory Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable B Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to Disks You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks In this case touch the large arrow icon in the center of the Copy Style screen in Step 4 above so that the arrow points upwards This turns the KF 7 s settings to copy the styles in the user memory to the floppy disk The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying Styles from disks to user memory 137
12. Choose Orr to silence the Rhythm sound 45 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment What is Automatic Accompaniment Press the One Touch Program Arranger button for Automatic Accompaniment s optimum settings Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with accompaniment in a variety of musical genres just by specifying chords in the left hand Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra even when performing alone What Are Music Styles Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called Music Styles y There are many different kinds of music around the world and each has its own unique features What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a unique combination of elements like instrumentation melody and phrasing which N g Q lt U interact to create the musical character Elements of Music Styles A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called divisions Division Description Intro Played at the start of a song Original The basic accompaniment pattern Variation This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern ls This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the Fill In To Original P P mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original This is a one measure phrase inserted at a point where the Fill In T f 9 mood changes and
13. Count In settings screen or the Countdown gence function p 48 settings screen appears When set to Off play all of the notes to specify chords of each item to make settings 4 Touch Exit to return to the Metronome screen B Settings for the Count In For detailed information about count in refer to Match the B Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected measure but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In p 80 position partway through a measure Z Count In Settins S _ For detailed information about Marker refer to Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 82 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch Marker Sound Measure Repeat The Marker screen appears 3 Touch Option A like the followi screen like the following appears Parame ter Name Value Description Marker Setting SSS Switch ON OFF Count in will be added ON or not OFF Stick Click Electronic Voice JPN Voice ENG i Resoluti z esolution Sound Wood Block Specify the count in sound Triangle Casta nets Hand Clap e Animal F 4 Touch lt Resolution gt to choose the marker oe o setting Mea Specify the length number rs 1 2
14. If you only place marker B playback repeats from the beginning of the song to marker B Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back Transpose By using the Transpose function you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play For example even if the song is in a difficult key with many sharps or flats b you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to read and play You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key When accompanying a vocalist you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is comfortable for the singer while still playing the notes as written i e with the same fingering positions 6 6666 0 1e3deu5 1 Press the Transpose button A Transpose screen like the one below appears 2 Touch the Transpose icon Icon Target Settings Value Keyboard sound 6 0 5 Song to be played back 24 0 424 Keyboard sounds songs being played back 6 0 5 85 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions 3 Touch the screen keyboard or to select the transposition value Each time you press 8 it transposes the key by a semitone a value of 0 is set When you touch amp You can also use the buttons or the dial to change the transposition value When you transpos
15. Touch Music Files in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 Select the performance part to be used for the harmonu 3 Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony When you sing into the microphone harmony is added using the pitches of the specified part Cancelling the effect 4 Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again The Music Files function is cancelled Touch Exit to go back to the Vocal Effects screen 38 Chapter 1 Performance B Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files 1 2 Connect a microphone Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied On the KF 7 use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo p 34 You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function p 35 and Harmonist function p 36 Select a song If selecting a song on a disk insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For instructions on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 65 Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo buttons If necessary change the key of the song p 85 When you press the W Play Stop button the accompaniment starts playing Sing along with the accompaniment When you play back a Music File with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen Press the m Play Stop button to stop the accompaniment vb Commercial music files designed for karaoke sing along are also av
16. resonance is called String Resonance At Step 3 in Procedure p 138 touch String Resonance String Resonance SB _ When a key is pressed this recreates the resonance vith Emm strings of keys already pressed Hin Max Touch lt ON gt to turn the String Resonance function on Touch the screen slider to adjust the amount of effect applied Moving the slider to Max increases the amount of resonance effect applied Moving the slider to Min reduces the amount of effect applied Touch lt OFF gt to cancel the effect Chapter 8 Various Settings E Adjusting the Keyboard Touch Changing the Settings for Key Touch One Touch Arranger You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the keys B Procedure At Step 3 in Procedure p 138 touch Key Touch 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button to display the Basic screen SS 5 Key Touch zz You can play with the most natural touch This is the touch ki I closest to that of an acoustic piano Lioht Heavy it Displa Explanation pal P 2 Touch Functions Notes sound atan unchanging volume level Fixed regardless of how lightly or forcefully you play the keyboard A screen like the one shown below appears Functions This sets the keyboard to a light touch You can achieve fortissimo ff play with a less Keu
17. 2 2 Swing 0 4 Stick March 2 4 Country Samba Waltz 1 Waltz 2 Waltz 3 3 4 Country Waltz Gospel Jazz Waltz 3 4 Simple 8 Beat 1 8 Beat 2 8 Beat 3 16 Beat 1 16 Beat 2 16 Beat 3 Rock 1 Rock 2 Swing 1 Swing 2 Shuffle 1 Shuffle 2 Brush Triplet March 1 4 4 March 2 Tango 1 Tango 2 Mambo 1 Mambo 2 House 1 House 2 House 3 Bossa Nova Samba 1 Samba 2 Rhumba Beguine 8 Beat 4 8 Beat 5 Beat Pattern Name Pattern Name Beat Measures 8 Beat 6 Shuffle2 4 4 1 16 Beat 4 Brush 4 4 2 2 16 Beat 5 Triplet 4 4 2 Rock 3 March 1 4 4 1 Rock 4 March 2 4 4 2 4 4 Simple Tango 1 4 4 2 5 4 5 4 Tango 2 4 4 2 6 4 6 4 Mambo 1 4 4 2 7 4 7 4 Mambo 2 4 4 2 3 8 3 8 House 1 4 4 2 Ballad House 2 4 4 2 March House 3 4 4 1 Swing BossaNova 4 4 2 6 8 Simple Samba 1 4 4 1 9 8 9 8 Samba 2 4 4 1 12 8 12 8 Rhumba 4 4 2 Beguine 4 4 1 Patterns That Can Be Sera Selected with the Edit d 8 Beat6 4 4 1 Functions 16 Beat4 4 4 1
18. A flanger that varies the pitch in a stepwise fashion Rhodes Multi The optimal effect for an electric piano Clean Guitar Applies an effect that combines com Multi 1 pressor chorus and delay Clean Guitar Applies an effect that combines Auto Multi 2 Wah Equalizer chorus and delay Tremolo Produces cyclical changes in volume Auto Pan Makes the sonic position of the sound move to the left or right Chorus Delay This effect connect a chorus and a delay in parallel Chorus Flanger This effect connect a chorus and a flanger in parallel Rotary Multi Applies an effect that combines rotary Equalizer and overdrive Enhancer Adds modulation to the sound Overdrive Applies soft distortion to the sound Distortion Applies hard distortion to the sound Auto Wah Changes the tone in a cyclical manner Compressor Suppresses fluctuations in volume Gate Reverb Cuts off the reverberations before they fade away completely Keyboard Multi Applies an effect that combines Ring Modulator Equalizer Pitch Shifter Phaser and Delay 2V Pitch Shifter Adds two pitch shifted sounds to the original sound two voice pitch shifter FB Pitch Shifter The pitch will change in steps feedback pitch shifter Enhancer Applies both enhancer and chorus Chorus effects Enhancer Applies both enhancer and flanger Flanger effects Enhancer gt Delay Applies
19. Changing the Tuning Tuning p Tuning 139 3 Touch the name of the parameter to be set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Basic screen 141 0 kn E 2 I U Chapter 8 Various Settings B Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point This sets the point the split point where the keyboard is divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split performances p 25 The setting is at F 3 when the KF 7 is powered up F 3 Split Point Y HP POP RI UP EET B1 B6 a NU The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left hand section of the keyboard AtStep 3 in Procedure p 141 touch Split Point Touch either C3 lt F 3 gt C4 or lt F 4 gt in the lower part of the screen The key you chose becomes the split point To set another key as the split point touch the screen then specify the key You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6 142 B Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting Normally when you select a Music Style the Tone and tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected automatically However you can also set it so the tempo and Tone settings don t change when you cha
20. Lurics Exit e 2 ij 2 Touch Play Mode A screen like the one shown below appears Music Files Playback Mode GS compliant tones used for playback Result is same as that from any other GS instrument Use KF tones for some tones Performance becomes more expressive Exit 3 Touch the icon to choose the setting Icon Description Playback uses GS compatible tones for performances that sound like GS other GS instruments Playback uses KF tones for greater expressiveness However differ KF ences may appear when playing back using devices other than the KF 4 Touch Exit to go back to the Menu screen 5 After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 65 87 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data When you play such music files the lyrics automatically appear in the screen If you do not want lyrics to appear automatically set this to OFF 1 Press the Menu button The Menu s
21. You can add tempo changes to a Tempo recorded composition See p 128 4 Touch lt Exit gt Returns to the Menu screen B Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording The recording process where previous material is erased as new material is recorded is called replace recording This setting is in effect when you turn on the power 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 117 select Replace Touch Exit to return to the Menu screen The KF 7 is set to the replace recording mode Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 4 p 90 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 B Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds Mix Recording You can record a performance layered over a previously recorded performance This method is called Mix Recording 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 117 select Mix Touch Exit to return to the Menu screen Record the performance using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 96 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 or other methods After you have finished with mix recording return to the usual replace recording mode 117 LT 2 G U Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Repeated Recording at the Same Location Loop Recording You can record a specified pas
22. 2 Touch the volume icon you ve selected When you touch KJ other volume levels the selection moves to the side allowing you to access ea g Qa lt U 1 ah D Choosing u sets the volume to the lowest level and choosing i sets it to the highest level Choose lorr to silence the metronome sound O Changing the Type of Sound You can change the sound the metronome makes The setting is at normal metronome sound when the KF 7 is powered up 1 a On the Metronome screen touch Sound The available choices for the type of sound appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Touch one of the items in the group to select a metronome sound Displayed Description Displayed Description Normal metronome Electronic metronome sound sound PALZ 1 2 3 in Japanese 1 2 3 in English EL n Dog and cat sounds Wood block x Hand clap he Triangle and castanet 42 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the Animation A metronome that moves along with the tempo is usually displayed at the center of the Metronome screen You can change that picture to an animated bouncing ball or other animation 1 On the Metronome screen touch the lt Type gt The animation type will change Each time you touch the icon the animation switches between Metronome Doctor and Bouncing Ball I 491deu5 O Changing how the metronome beat patt
23. Accompaniment On Off Chord Intelligence On Off Leading Bass On Off Original Variation Sync Start On Off lt Accomp gt setting for Arranger Settings Arranger Configuration Style Orchestrator Division 180 Music Files That the KF 7 Can Use What Are Music Files Music Files contain information describing the details of a musical performance such as the C3 key on a keyboard was pressed for this amount of time using this amount of force By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the KF 7 the performance information is sent from the floppy disk to the piano and played faithfully by the piano This is different than a CD since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself This makes it possible to erase certain parts or to change instruments tempos and keys freely allowing you to use it in many different ways Regarding Copyright Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder B The KF 7 allows you to use the following music files Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series or Roland Piano Digital HP G R KR and KF Series instrument Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Fil
24. Mute on the screen The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you selected If you want to hear the muted out Part touch Mute again To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds intro ending or fill in touch Mute immediately after switching to the Division 4 adeyyo 131 m x Qa lt U Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles O Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part Displaying the Part settings screen 1 At the Style Composer screen touch Options A screen like the one shown below appears Modifying the settings of each part 2 Touch the ASS Reed to select the part with the settings to be changed The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper part of the screen 3 Touch You can also change the values by touching each parameter name and then using the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the parameter to its original value Display Explanation Volume Adjusts the volume Reverb Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound Chore Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied to the sound Changes the left right direction from which the sound appears to come Panpot When you touch the sound moves to the right touch M to move the sound to the left You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone b
25. Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 88 Cana Cana Cana Cana 89 Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale Falamenco Hi Timbale EOE Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale Falamenco Lo Timbale 91 Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam Falamenco Tmbl Flam E shekere 1 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 Shekere 1 93 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 Shekere 2 m Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute Low Bongo Mute 33 High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute 7j MM EL NENG 98 po KG om mE m 100 Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Falamenco HC 101 Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Falamenco HC Falamenco HC EA Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell 2 WOS i mew NG l sem E Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell Bongo Cowbell 3 goce ELE amp 8 7 167 Drum Set List No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number STANDARD Set ROOM Set POWER Set ELECTORONIC Set AMNEM E Uii a cC 24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime JEJ Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll 26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap LEM iha High Q High Q High Q 28 Slap Slap Slap Slap 29 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 TEN Scratch Pul EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch
26. S If you don t want the metronome to play press the Metronome button and indicator light goes out 2 a Touch Countdown The following Countdown settings screen appears Countdown Settings Ae Sound Part 3 a Touch Switch ti to set this to ON When you press the One Touch Program Arranger button the performance starts and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro O Cancelling the countdown 1 a Inthe Metronome screen touch lt Countdown gt NEM For more about settings on the 7 Countdown screen refer to BH to set this to OFF Settings for the Countdown p 147 2 a Touch Switch This sets the KF 7 so that the countdown does not play 56 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Modifying an Accompaniment MEMD When you use Automatic Accompaniment you can easily add Fill Ins to the You can add variation to the accompaniment patterns change arrangements and make other changes Automatic Accompaniment by assigning different functions to the Performance Pads and B Changing the Accompaniment Pattern pedals For more information Fi ll In Butto ns see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads There are two accompaniment patterns the Original and a Variation In addition a Pedal Setting User fill in or short phrase is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns Functions p 143 change which a
27. Selecting the part that you ll be playing fei When a single Part is not played it is called Minus 2 Pressany one of the Track buttons to make the button s indicator light go One eins Minos Cue ya dark can mute out a particular instrument and play the part The sound for the selected part no longer plays yourself For example when practicing the right hand press the 4 Upper button When you play back the song the right hand performance will not sound Practice MEM your right hand performance along with the left hand playback When playing back SMF files for Roland Piano Digital series Playing back a song instruments and the 3 Lower button and 4 Upper 3 Press the m Play Stop button button do not c rrectly c ntral the left right hand The song will begin playing back performances please change The part you selected in step 2 will not sound the Track Assign settings Please refer to Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Once again press the button you selected in step 2 The button s indicator will light up and the part will be heard once again Even while the song is playing you can press the track buttons to mute or un mute Track Assign p 89 the sound A Stopping the song You can adjust the balance between the keyboard and 4 Pressthe m Play Stop button song volume levels Check out Adjusting the Volume The song will stop Balance for Each
28. TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR A Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Bldg No 47 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road AI Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of April 1 2003 Roland For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15
29. TEL 095 169 5043 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab AI Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON
30. When using markers to specify a section to be repeated p 84 you can rewind and fast forward only within the range between Marker A and Marker B Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions E Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo Memb or genre Only the KF 7 s internal songs You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name are searchable 1 a Press the Select Listen to a Song button 2 a Touch Search The following Song Search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen s e Song Search sep Song Search EISE Specifu initial letter of keuvord to search then touch Search e 2 ij Touch here to switch these screens O Searching by conditions 3 Touch the parameter you want to set then use the buttons and the dial to select the search conditions With Data songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs You can use four different criteria in searches Chords Lyrics Fingering fingering numbers and Any By selecting a song containing any of this data then displaying it in the KF 7 s score you can display information about the selected data 4 a Touch Search The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song T
31. Z Melody Intelligence Exerc Organ Bio Band 2 Select and touch a harmony type Then when you play a melody on the keyboard a harmony style is automatically MEMO added With some harmonies Tones When you touch Exit you re returned to the previous screen while the Melody may change automatically Intelligence function remains selected Also when you play several keys at the same time in some 3 Press the Melody Intelligence button once more and the indicator light cases harmony may be added to one note goes out The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled 60 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Lower Tone Normally when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance sounds are not produced by playing the left hand part of the keyboard When you touch the lt Lower gt icon you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This sets the Automatic Accompaniment 2 On the Basic screen touch Lower Now when you play a chord in the left hand keyboard area the notes you play will sound and the accompaniment chord changes z adeyyo Stopping the sound in the left hand 3 a Touch Lower The lt Lower gt icon reverts to black and the left hand Tones stop playing 61 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompanim
32. etc near the unit Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry soft cloth N CAUTION The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation e Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit e At regular intervals you should unplug the AC adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be N placed so they are out of the reach of children e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit S N CAUTION e Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with T wet hands when plugging into or unplugging W from an outlet or this unit e If you need to move the instrument take note of the precautions listed below At least two persons o are required to safely lift and move the unit It should be handled carefully all the while keeping it level Make sure to have a firm grip to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage Check to make sure the knob bolts
33. fingering Language English Germany French Spanish Lyrics Yes built in MIDI output Control Volume Brilliance Volume Balance Contrast Mic Volume One Touch Program One Touch Piano One Touch Arranger Vocal Effects Echo Voice Transformer Vocal Keyboard Harmonist Output jacks L Mono R Input jacks L Mono R Mic Input jack Headphones jack Stereo MIDI In connector MIDI Out connector Computer connector Connectors Damper Pedal half pedal recognition Soft Pedal half pedal recognition 35 functions assignable Sostenuto Pedal 35 functions assignable Power Supply AC adaptor PSB 3U Power Consumption 35 W Dimensions Piano KF 7 1 321 W x 421 D x 136 H mm Stand KSC 18 1 258 W x 390 D x 639 H mm Total KF 7 1 321 W x 421 D x 774 H mm Including the Music Rest 1 321 W x 482 D x 946 H mm Weights including the piano stand Piano KF 7 30 kg 66 lbs 3 oz Stand KSC 18 11 5 kg 25 lbs 6 oz Total 41 5 kg 91 Ibs 8 oz Accessories Quick Start Owner s Manual Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Music Rest Screws for Music Rest Keyboard Cover Pedal DP 8 AC adaptor PSB 3U AC cord 184 In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice Numerics 16 Track Sequencer a inisi aiie 113 A Accompani
34. gt gt Fwd buttons to select another measure to begin 5 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is light up The KF 7 is put in recording standby 6 Press the m Play Stop button A two bar count in sounds then recording starts You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the 16 track sequencer 7 Press the W Play Stop button Recording stops When one part is recorded continue by selecting and recording another part Continue layering parts to finish recording the song gt You only need to follow the procedure described in Step 1 Prepare for Recording when you re recording the first Part For the second Part and after you can skip step 1 and proceed from Step 2 Start Recording Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KF 7 is turned off It is a good idea to save song data to a floppy disk or user memory For more information refer to Saving Songs p 101 116 Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode You can use any of the four methods below to record with the KF 7 Although you will normally be using Replace Recording where previously recorded material is erased when new sounds are recorded you ll find that you can record songs easily by using this method in combination with other recording methods Replace Recording p 117 This is the normal method for recording New material is recorded as previously re
35. 1 C3l48 Timpani c Room Hi Tom 2 High Tom 2 E Timpani ct Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 Timpani d Room Hi Tom 1 High Tom 1 EB Timpani d Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 Timpani e Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal 53 Timpani f Ride Bell Ride Bell EEE Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal E Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Concert Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 E Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap i Concert Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 C4 60 High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo Kil Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo 62 Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga E Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga 84 Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale E Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo cs Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa p EN Maracas Maracas Maracas Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 C572 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 EN Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 B Claves Claves Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 7 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block EZ Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 EE Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 M
36. 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Tutor SS _ 1 throush 148 Measure The right hand part Banoe Tenno Original tempo Switch the screens 2 Touch the icon for the parameter you want to set The selections appear Touch the setting icon Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set each of the parameters Set the tempo practice range and other variables to the values you prefer Touch lt Audition gt The practice range is played back using the selected settings 5 a Touch lt Exit gt You re returned to the Practice screen 76 Farameigr Value Description Set Left Hand Part Right Hand Selects the part or parts to be practiced MEMO Both Hands When the Transpose function Specifies measures for practice p 85 is set to ON the original Most of the KF 7 s internal songs have markers set in or T 2 Range 1 i tone plays even if Tone is set m der to make repeated practice easier You can specify the E to Do Re Mi g markers range by touching lt Prev gt or lt Next gt 2 E Original Tempo A Little Slower 5 Tempo Slower Selects the practice tempo Much Slower When On is selected song accompaniment parts are also played back Accomp On Quiet Off When Quiet is selected song accompaniment parts are played back at a lower volume When Off is selected song accompaniment parts are muted Selects the ton
37. 4 adeyyo o L1 2 6 o Chapter 8 Various Settings Changing the Settings for One Touch Piano You can make detailed settings such as those for the keyboard touch and tunings allowing you to set up the KF 7 just the way you want for your piano performances B Procedure l Press the One Touch Program Piano button The Piano screen appears J l08 4 4 Functions gt For more information about the Piano screen refer to Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano p 20 2 Touch Functions Touch Exit to go back the Piano screen Display Page Display Page Resonance p 138 Hammer Response p 140 Tuning p 139 String Resonance p 140 Key Touch p 141 gt You can set the master tuning and make a variety of other settings to the instrument starting from the third page of Functions For more detailed information refer to Other Settings p 147 3 Touch the icon for the setting Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Touch Exit to return to the Piano screen 138 B Adjusting Resonance Resonance You can adjust this resonance Sympathetic Resonance when the damper pedal is depressed At Step 3 in Procedure p 138 touch Resonance Recreates the sound Level of strinos resonatino sunpathetically when rioht pedal is depressed Display Explanation S
38. B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada This owner s manual is printed on recycled paper Roland Corporation 03019723 03 6 2N
39. Bwd button Rewinds the song gt gt Fwd button Fast forwards the song Transpose button Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played p 85 Vocal Effect Button Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone p 33 Disk Drive You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs p 65 p 101 Eject Button Ejects a floppy disk from the disk drive p 99 11 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel 1 2 6 o0 mee Qg Qw Min tox e O Jr o HM 2 oO 9 eo Ce Meno 2 NL o U Power DC In Line Out folur Mic Computer MIDI Use Roland PSB 3U adaptor ony 1 N w Mic Volume Knob Adjusts the volume level for the microphone p 18 Mic In Jack Used for connecting microphones p 18 Computer Computer Sw itch Switches the connections for the MIDI connectors and the computer port p 159 Also this switch is set to Mac PC 1 or PC 2 according to the type computer that s connected Computer Connector You can connect a computer to this jack to exchange performance information p 159 You can t use the MIDI Out In connector and the Computer connector at the same time MIDI Out In Connectors Connect between these and external MIDI instruments to exchange performance information p 153 Pedal Jacks Connect the supplied damper pedal DP 8 the expression pedal EV 5 or
40. Chord Tone sasana 2 a na kana CER aa asi eels 55 145 Chord types eee gana pang odie teed aaa ngga ag a a A eiA 48 Chords naa aa aka hoes teda e aee ts 48 72 era CE 72 GET nara a er eee eese te i e Re tent ET as 72 Compatibility ss 565 s sanga ag E gena ia Ge gana ga NG eee 103 Composer MIDI Out eee 157 Computer san aides aaa ngabani dk a ede feed 158 Computer Connector esee eee nene 159 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start Computer Switch essent 159 Connecting Audio Equipment tees 157 GOmPUler 4221 0 ath ered dai eni ted nue 158 MIDI device seisein e sederet panas aaa gagean tan 153 Contrast 1 dte sese tete tees etre ie bp eae e ed eae esit oae Yee nana anan 19 Contrast knoD i ee Ee d t eei bad sea 19 Copy Gong Edit ense ette 122 Copying SONGS aet erre fee ee te eode ceteros 105 User Progra ideian 111 User Styles nonet eum 137 Count In attenti eee lii he des dt eie deest eate dee teria uode d 80 CoUnitdOWHD Siete eto teet esee SE eee ae ETHER OE eee esit Lee an angan ERR 56 SettiriBSuatiunn ai ATA onde better dated oe 147 Count In SOUS Lee uH CLP ub th 146 D Delete Song Edit 1 retinet eet tenete 124 Deleting ASON cielos d n etd e Dome den oae t ef kaka ka 104 User Style tar eet e e etes 136 Disk Driv8 55 e te nee sak aan itis 99 DIVINS ei eo rte eerta erre eee esee eee ee dede gi 46 Pran Set List 5 22 oni eeiam eats 16
41. Connecting External Devices 153 Connecting MIDI Devices 153 CCODBeCEOIS rasaae aaa EE NG Naga oe e a aa 153 Making the Connections 000eseseeen nenen ne naen en nane n anan ae 154 Synchronizing with Connected MIDI Devices 154 Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments MIDEEnsemble ero rre te either 155 MIDI Settings aras sagang aga e Gang ga ae ang aaa aa agen 155 Selecting the Transmit Channel Tx Channel 156 Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control 0esessesenaea nanas an anna n anan anana nanam naam anana 156 Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB esee 156 Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device Composer MIDI Out see eee 157 Connecting to Audio Equipment sss 157 COMMECHOTS es deiode MU M PR gt tcs 157 Making the Connections ssssssssseeenee 157 Connecting a Computer ssssssssssseeeennentenenetenee 158 Connect to the MIDI Connectors sss 158 Connect to the Computer Connector ssssssss 159 Connectors shkence ca lake ees 159 Making the Connections Troubleshooting eisie er ag Ga aa aga aan 161 Appendices aassana anan anenun anu nenn nne nana nan nnmnnn na 161 Error Messages estoena gada De aa ea aan ga a nga ia a agan 164 JO a a aan
42. EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 81 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 a Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell u C684 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree g E Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 g m Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 EN 9 1 1l a lt q 168 Drum Set List No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number JAZZ TR 808 Set DANCE Set GS STANDARD Set BRUSH Set 2 A ING gt NG c Es ANG NA TA GG TG A TG A T 20 24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime EJ Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll 26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap EM iona High Q High Q High Q 28 Slap Slap Slap Slap 29 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 m 30 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 31 Sticks Dance Snr 1 Sticks Sticks En Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click 33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click EM Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Std Kick 2 Kick 1 Std Kick 2 Kick 2 36 808 Bass Drum
43. EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 amp mL Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 3 LEM KW OMNcssdcm p 169 Drum Set List No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number ORCHESTRA Set GS ROOM Set GS BRUSH Set a P 23m eee a 24 Bar Chime Bar Chime Bar Chime Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll 26 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap JE Close Hi hat EXC1 HighQ High Q 28 Pedal Hi hat EXC1 Slap Slap 29 Open Hi hat EXC1 Scratch Push EXC7 Scratch Push EXC7 EJ Ride Cymbal Scratch Pull EXC7 Scratch Pull EXC7 31 Sticks Sticks Sticks 32 Square Click Square Click Square Click 33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click m Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell id Concert BD 2 Std Kick 2 Std Kick 2 C2 a6 Concert BD 1 Std Kick 1 Std Kick 1 EZ Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick 38 Concert SD Snare Drum 1 Brush Tap E Castanets Hand Clap Brush Slap 40 Concert SD Snare Drum 2 Brush Swirl 41 Timpani F Room Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 EH Timpani F Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 43 Timpani G Room Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 EZM Timpani G Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 45 Timpani A Room Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 UEM Timpani A OpenHrhati EXC1 Open Hi hat EXC1 Timpani B Room Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom
44. Eb E F Cmaj7 C maj7 Dmaj7 Eb maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7 EAN ERE REIS TE EL CPUS C7 C 7 D7 Eb7 WW CREER TATANAN STRE RETE REIR Cm C m Dm Ebm Em Fm nd ANAA Cea PETE CREPE TE CERRO ETE NADA NA Cm7 C m7 Dm7 Eb m7 Em7 Fm7 MIU d P dd Cdim C dim Ddim Ebdim Edim Fdim NIRA ANANA GARA LANA AA ANAA ANAA LEUR D QR ELE EET Cm7 b5 C m7 b5 Dm7 b5 Eb m7 b5 Em7 b5 Fm7 b5 Lida ANA AKA T HP dd Caug C aug Daug Eb aug Eaug Faug BLU ALAA ANAA AA LANA ANA LAN AAK ANAA LALA d Csus4 C sus4 Dsus4 Eb sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 ELTE CELERE eL IN CPST PPE ee d KANAKA NA C7sus4 C 7sus4 D7sus4 Eb 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 eT DU ay A AAN d C 6 D6 Eb6 RW PE E HET YANA C m6 Dm6 Eb m6 TINH TR PE 2 PER PR Chord List 6 symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 48 F maj7 Gmaj7 Abmaj7 Amaj7 Bb maj7 Bmaj7 PALARAN LANA ANANA f LANA DNA BAKAR AA P om ESTHET F 7 G7 Ab7 A7 Bb7 B7 EETNL LE EE E PETER PRETI F m Gm Abm Am Bbm Bm EE ETE E M F m7 Abm7 Bb m7 Bm7 Loca adc cab o cd LL JA F dim Gdim Abdim Adim Bb dim Bdim bli KANAAN AKAN AAN MAA LAKA UU F m7 b5 Gm7 b5 Abm7 b5 Am7 b5 Bb m7 b5 Bm7 b5 Mr em rH F aug Gaug Abaug Aaug Bb aug Baug Fitsus4 Gsus4 Absus4 Asus4 Bb sus4 Bsus4 F 7sus4 G7sus4 Ab7sus4 A7sus4 Bb 7sus4 B7sus4 PTEN BHL KALANA NAKAL ALAA A DAKA KANAAN ANAA A ANA AGA F 6 A6 B
45. Eject button The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot Grasp the edge of the floppy disk and gently pull it out B Formatting Floppy Disks Format A newly purchased floppy disk or a floppy disk that has been used by another device cannot be used as is Such floppy disks must be formatted initialized for use with the KF 7 If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn t match the format of this unit you won t be able to use that floppy disk MEMD If you re using the disk drive for the first time be sure to read the important notes on p 6 Never remove the disk while it is being read or written Doing so will scratch the magnetic surface of the disk making it unusable The disk drive indicator will light brightly while data is being read or written Normally it will be lit dimly or will be dark When a floppy disk is initialized all of the data saved on the disk is erased e 2 5 n If you re formatting a used floppy disk for reuse be sure to check first to make sure the disk doesn t contain any data you don t want to lose fh Q0 O 00000 Select listen to a Song Disk First make sure that the protect tab of the floppy disk is in the Write write enable position Rear side of the disk Write can write new data onto disk Write Protect Tab Protect prevents writing to disk 99 Chapte
46. Func tions p 143 No sound is heard when a MIDI in strument is con nected Have all devices been switched on Are the MIDI cables connected correctly p 154 Does the MIDI channel match the connected instrument p 156 Is the Computer switch on the rear panel set to MIDI p 159 Normal pedal operation is automatically en abled when the One Touch Program Piano button is pressed p 20 The volume level of the instrument connected to Input jacks is too low Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor You cannot use a connected MIDI device and com puter simulta neously The MIDI connectors and the computer con nector cannot be used at the same time Confirm that the computer switch is set to MIDI when a MIDI device is connected to the MIDI connector and to either MAC PC 1 PC 2 when a computer is connect ed to the Computer connector p 159 No sound is heard Has Local Control been set to Off When Local Control is set to Off no sound is nen HIST MOS produced by playing the keyboard i played Set Local Control to On p 156 The maximum number of notes that the KF 7 can play simultaneously is 128 Frequent use Not all played of the damper pedal during automatic accom notes are sound ed paniment or when playing along with
47. Functions screen B Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune Standard pitch generally refers to the pitch that is heard when you play middle A When performing in an ensemble with other instruments adjust the standard pitch so that the instruments of the ensemble match Tuning all the instruments to a standard pitch is called master tuning At Step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Master Tune A screen like the one shown below appears gt 5 Master Tune SSRE_ Touch Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415 3 466 2 Hz to change the pitch The setting is at 440 0 Hz when the KF 7 is powered up B Changing the Language Language Five choices are available for the language used in displaying information on the screen At Step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Language A screen like the one shown below appears language SSS T Touch to select the language Available settings English Japanese German French Spanish German Spanish and French are displayed for some functions Other screens will be displayed in English 148 B Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase when the power is turned on AtStep 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Opening Message A screen like the one shown below appears Opening Message SRS _
48. Microphone Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late at night or early in the morning When connecting a microphone to the KF 7 be sure to lower the volume If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in noise may be produced by the speakers Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by Changing the orientation of the microphone Relocating microphone at a greater distance from speakers Lowering volume levels Before You Start Playing About the Touch Screen The KF 7 makes use of a touch screen This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger Pressing hard or using a hard object can damage the touch screen Be careful not to press too hard and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the touch screen The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time If this happens follow the steps in Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 151 to correct the pointer position Do not place items on the touch screen B Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen To adjust the contrast of the screen turn the Contrast knob located at the right side of the screen Song Collection O sasarane Sg Main Scree
49. Part Balance p 63 81 m g Q lt s Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly you can then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures B Placing a Marker within a Song You can place two separate markers Marker A and Marker B in one song These markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of a section of music Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like You can add markers or move to a marker even while playback is in progress Access the Marker screen First select the song in which you ll set the markers p 65 1 a Press the Menu button 2 a Touch Marker The Marker screen appears 37 Sonate No 15 pr uc Repeat Placing Markers 3 Goto the measure where you want to set a marker using the Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons 4 Touch lt gt for Marker A Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the marker 5 Inthe same way touch the Marker B lt gt to set Marker B It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A 82 vb Markers can also be assigned in
50. Quantize Delete Insert Erase Transpose Part Exchange Note Edit PC Edit Control Song Select Reset Play Stop Rec Bwd Fwd All Song Play Random Play Track Select Count in Countdown Playback Balance Marker Set Repeat Tempo Mute 183 gt 5 6 5 2 8 un un S D c 7 Q Q E Main Specifications Other Functions Touch the Notes Replay Select Various Tones Song Stylist Session Partner Wonderland Game Quick Tour Audition Panel Lock Disk Drive Disk Storage 3 5 inch Micro Floppy Disk Disk Format 720K bytes 2DD 1 44M bytes 2HD Files Max 99 songs Max 99 User Styles Max 99 User Program Sets Note Storage Approx 120 000 notes 2DD Approx 240 000 notes 2HD Playable Software Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 1 Roland Original Format i Format Music Style MSA MSD MSE Save Song Standard MIDI Files Format 0 Roland Original Format i Format Music Style MSE lt Internal Memory gt Internal Songs Song Search by terms and by letters Over 170 songs User Memory Max 200 songs on Favorites Max 99 User Styles Max 99 User Program sets lt Others gt Rated Power Output 12W x2 Speakers 10cm x 2 5cm x 2 Display Bouncing Beat Indicator Graphical LCD 320 x 240 dot backlit LCD Score Grand staff G Clef staff F Clef staff with note name lyrics chords
51. Raising the level too much may Q cause the sound to become distorted i I You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to 0 When you touch lt Exit gt the equalization is placed in effect and you return to the previous screen Cancelling the effect 4 a Press the Equalizer button and watch the indicator light go out The equalizer effect is cancelled O Storing the settings You can store adjusted equalizer settings to lt User gt Even after editing the settings you can touch lt User gt to call up your preferred settings 1 Press the Equalizer button and watch the indicator light up The Equalizer screen appears 2 Adjust the equalizer 3 a Touch Write The settings are stored Even after editing the settings you can touch User to select the stored settings 31 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Effects to Each Tone and Voice B Applying Effects to the Sound Effects You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the MEMp For more on the effect types refer to the Effects List p 172 keyboard 1 First press the Tone button to select a Tone p 21 The Tone selection screen appears EX 2 St Harp W ias DecauStrings oa Oct Strings n Legato Str eu Dx g Qa lt S 2 Then touch Effec
52. Recording Part of Your 3 Begin recording Performance Punch in Reco rding Begin recording using the procedures described in You can re record part of a passage as you listen to a Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing recorded performance This recording method is called Recordings p 96 or Multitrack Recording with 16 Punch in Recording This convenient function lets you Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a Up until the specified passage the previously recorded prerecorded performance in another section performance plays back User Punch In Recording by the following two methods When you reach the specified passage sounds are erased Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B Auto Punch In Out Before you start recording place markers A and B to as recording starts begin playing now When you reach the end of the specified passage define the passage you want to re record Make the recording stops and the KF 7 returns to playback of the previously recorded performance setting for punch in recording and re record just the passage between markers A and B 4 When you press the W Play Stop button the Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons song stops Are Pressed Manual Punch In Out O Starting Recording from the Measure You can play back a performance and depress the pedal Specified by Buttons and Ped
53. Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Accompani Arranger Stop ment stops Recording does not stop even when the Automatic Accompa Composer Stop niment stops When you press the m Play Stop but ton recording stops Recording Songs Starting with Pickups You can record songs that start with pickup beats songs that start on a beat other than the measure s first beat Measure 2 PU 1 4 Recording begins here lt kn g 2 6 lt o Carry out Steps 1 4 on p 91 to prepare for recording If the Rec button s indicator is not lit press the amp Rec button so the indicator is lit The KF 7 is put in recording standby 1 a Press the lt Bwd button one time The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to PU and the KF 7 is set to record a song starting with a pickup 4 108 Neu Sono 4 Start recording Aftera one measure count recording begins 98 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Using Floppy Disks You can use the KF 7 s disk drive to save songs to floppy disks and listen to commercial music files B Inserting and Ejecting a Floppy Disk Inserting a floppy disk 1 With the front of the floppy disk facing up insert the disk in the disk drive slot until there is an audible click Indicator t Floppy Disk Eject Button Removing a floppy disk 2 a Press the
54. Root Note 106 G O All chord roots are indicated as a letter sometimes with or b added and correspond to the notes shown below B Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence Chord Intelligence is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the moment you play a key To play a C chord for example you normally have to play the three keys C E and G But with Chord Intelligence you only have to press the C key to start a C chord accompaniment e How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode Major Ex C A NAN Play the chord root Seventh Ex C7 Play the root and Wwe the second key above it Major Seventh Ex C maj 7 Play the root and the first key below it 48 Minor Ex C m Play the root and m m the third key above it Minor Seventh Ex C m7 Play the root Mb the third key above it and the second key below it Diminished Ex C dim Play the root and the sixth key above it MEMD You can cancel the Chord Intelligence function For more information see Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config p 145 MEMp For more information about chord fingering refer to the Chord List p 174 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Finder Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered you can display the notes of the chord on the screen 1
55. SS You can choose from among the eight tunings described below Tuning Characteristics system This temperament divides the octave into 12 equal parts All intervals will be Equal slightly out of tune by the same amount This setting is in effect when you turn on the power This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals pure It is unsuited to play ing melodies and cannot be transposed but is capable of beautiful sonorities Just Maj Just intonation differs between major and minor keys The same results as ma jor can be obtained in a minor key Just Min This tuning is suitable for the music of Arabic Arabia This temperament is a modification of meantone temperament and just intona tion allowing more freedom of modula tion Performances are possible in all keys III Kirnberger This temperament is based on the theo ries of the Greek philosopher Pythago Pythagorean ras and has pure fourths and fifths Chords containing a third will sound im pure but melodies will sound good Tunin Yu 9 Characteristics system This temperament is a partial compro Meantone mise of just intonation in order to allow modulation This temperament is a combination of meantone and Pythagorean tempera ments It allows you to play in all keys First method number three Werkmeister Touch any one of the icons to choose the tunin
56. Sono Ede 1 Neu Sono Touch Disk or Favorites Touch Disk if you are deleting a song from a floppy disk touch Favorites if you are deleting a song from Favorites o select the song to be deleted Touch Delete A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file Are you sure Touch lt OK gt The selected song is deleted Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the operation is finished Touching lt Cancel gt cancels the operation Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Song File screen Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Copying Songs on Disks to Favorites You can take songs saved on floppy disks and copy them to Favorites You can also copy songs in Favorites to floppy disks 1 Insert the disk with the song to be copied in the disk drive 2 Press the Disk button 3 Touch File Touch Copy The following Copy Song screen appears Copy Song 6 Favorites e 2 5 n Specifying the Copy Source 5 Touch the Disk t to select the song you want to copy When Copy All is selected all of the songs on the disk are copied to Favorites Specifying the Copy Destination 6 Touch lt Favorites gt o
57. Style User button A User Style screen appears If the User Style screen is not displayed touch lt User Disk gt in the lower part of the screen 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Delete gt A Delete Style screen like the following appears gt Delete Stule Disk ME 4 Touch lt Disk gt or lt User gt Touch lt User gt if you are deleting a file from user memory touch lt Disk gt if you are deleting a file from a floppy disk o select the Style to be deleted 6 Touch Delete A screen like the one shown below appears DK to delete file fire uou sure 7 Touch lt OK gt The selected Style is deleted If you touch Cancel the Style won t be deleted Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles Copying Styles on Disks to the User Memory You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy them to user memory You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks 1 Insert the disk with the Style to be copied in the disk drive 2 Press the User button A User Style screen like the following appears 0 finericanPopl Preset If the User Style screen is not displayed touch User Disk in the lower part of the screen 3 Touch File
58. Tones and perform other main KF 7 functions easily by pressing the main buttons found on both sides of the screen With the Select Listen to a Song button you can select over 170 internal songs from songs for piano practice to the latest hits Pressing the Score Display button lets you display not only the score for any of the internal songs but for your own recorded songs and songs on floppy disks With the Music Assistant button you can select a song you want to play call up Automatic Accompaniment settings that match that song and while looking at the chord score perform with accompaniment added Thanks to the Select Various Tones button which is used to select suggested Tones from the more than 600 internal Tones the Song Stylist button which allows you to listen to a variety of arrangements of the internal popular songs and transform them into rock jazz or other forms of music and the Session Partner button which lets you leave the chords and rhythm to the backing band and give your performances the feel of a group session you can enjoy playing the KF 7 in a great variety of creative ways Introduction O A Variety of Support Functions for Fostering Rich Musical Abilities In addition to score displays that let you see note names and fingerings and a bouncing ball that keeps track of the notes currently being played you can also enjoy other powerful practice functions like repeated practice of a specifie
59. Touch n Pedal Settino Light forceful touch than usual so the keyboard ee P feels lighter This setting makes it easier for Split Point i firranger Confio children whose hands have less strength tr Touch Setting i Tuning This sets the keyboard to the standard touch You can play with the most natural touch Maalum This setting is closest to the response of an acoustic piano This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch You have to play the keyboard more forcefully Parame D o Haag than usual in order to play fortissimo ff so ter Name Description y the keyboard touch feels heavier This set ting allows you to add more expression Key Refer to Adjusting the Keyboard Touch when playing dynamically Touch Key Touch p 141 Split Point Sets the key at which the keyboard is Touch any of the icons Fixed Light Mediums or divided the split point p 142 Heavy to set the key touch for the keyboard One Selects the setting to be specified when the To make fine adjustments touch the slider in the screen Touch One Touch Program Arranger button is Settin d p 142 Move the slider to the right to add resistance and to the right g prens dip to make the key touch lighter Pedal Setting Assigns functions to the pedal p 143 e 2 E 3 8 3 co Arranger Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment Config plays sounds p 145 Refer to
60. When you perform a Factory Reset all settings that have been stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their factory defaults gt This operation does not return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory condition To return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings refer to Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings p 151 gt When you want to restore the content registered to the KF 7 s User memory to the factory condition refer to Formatting the User Memory p 151 At step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Factory Reset A screen like the one shown below appears ZER Factory Reset Js This vill restore all the internal memory contents to factory presets Touch Execute The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to restore the original factory settings When the setting is changed the previous screen returns When you touch Cancel the settings are left untouched and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates Executing Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 8 Various Settings B Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen If you ve been using the touch screen for some time the pointer may be shifted making the KF 7 react incorrectly You should correct this displacement
61. Woodblock Taiko Melo Tom 1 Synth Drum ReverseCym Fret Noise BreathNoise Seashore Bird Telephone 1 Helicopter Applause Gun Shot Tone with a symbol appended to their name may not play back satisfactorily on other GS sound generating devices instruments of the same number No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion POP Set ROCK Set JAZZ BRUSH Set VOX DRUM Set KR 7 21 R amp B Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Snare R amp B Snare mL Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare Rock Snare Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Rock Snare 24 Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m E Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare Ghost 26 Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m Pop Snare m IEA Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap 28 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps 707 Claps Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 Hand Clap EXC7 EE Hand Clap2 EXC7 Hand Clap2 EXC7 Hand Clap2 EXC7 Hand Clap2 EXC7 31 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap E Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH EXC1 Pop Pedal HH 33 Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap Gospel Hand Clap mm Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Vox Dut Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Dom 2136 Pop Kick Rock Kick Pop Kick Vox Tuush WH Pop Side Stick Rock S
62. a On the Basic screen touch lt 1 154 E z adeyyo 2 Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about The chord fingering appears on screen SII A Cmaj C7 Cdim Cm b5 Cauo Csus4 C7sus4 For example if you wanted to see the fingering for a C chord you would touch lt C gt then touch lt gt Touch Exit to go back to the Basic screen 49 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons Music Styles are divided into six groups with each assigned to one of the Music Style buttons N kn d 1 E Press the One Touch Program Arranger button For mare ori the Music Style names refer to the Music 2 Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group Style List p 173 Watch the indicator button light up Six of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen Easu Listen This screen is called the Style Selection screen You can listen to the Music Style by touching Audition J to switch the screen and display the next selections You can touch Search to find Styles that match the selected criteria p 52 3 Select a Music Style and touch the Music Style name You can use the buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and selec
63. a Touch Search The search results appear in the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Touch Exit to return to the Style Search screen O Searching by Music Style name 3 Touch By Name Touch lt By Key gt to return to the Condition Search screen 4 a Decide which character you ll use for the search The selected character appears in the middle of the screen Enter the character you are searching for For example touching ABC in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B C Touch A 0 to toggle between alphabets and numerals 5 a Touch Search The search results appear on the display Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style Touch Exit several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 52 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles om 000000 0 Select a Music Style p 50 Some Music Styles do not 2 Press the One Touch Program Piano button include rhythm patterns When you select these Style z adeyyo The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played patterns no rhythm patterns 3 a Press the Intro Ending button are played even when you lay on the left side of the The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins starting from th
64. after fev ninutes of screen to start the deno 3 Touch ON or OFF When set to ON the Quick Tour starts when you turn on the power The demo stops as soon as you carry out any kind of operation If no operation is performed for 5 10 minutes after that the automatic demo starts again When set to OFF the Quick Tour does not start unless you touch the Quick Tour screen icon 4 Touch Exit to return to the Quick Tour screen For more information about Quick Tour refer to the Quick Start 152 Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Panel Lock The Panel Lock function locks the KF 7 in a state where only piano performance can be used and all buttons will be disabled This prevents the settings from being inadvertently modified even if children press the buttons accidentally In the Panel Lock state only the grand piano sound can be played 1 Turn down the volume all the way 2 Press the Power switch to turn off the power 3 While holding down the Wonderland Game button press the Power switch and turn on the power Then continue to hold down the button until the Piano screen appears All buttons except for piano play are disabled Adjust the volume When you play the keyboard the grand piano sound will be heard To undo the Panel Lock function turn the volume down to the minimum and turn on the power once again Chapter
65. attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Never use or store the unit in places that are S Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or AI are Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are Subject to high levels of vibration e Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The S symbol alerts t
66. button The Menu screen appears 16tr Sequencer Marker Sona Edit 2 Touch Style Composer Ifa User Style has already been recorded a message like the one shown below appears OK to delete Stule Touch Cancel to return to the Menu screen Save User Styles to floppy disks or to user memory p 135 When you touch OK the previously recorded User Style is deleted and a new User Style is created Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles A Style Composer screen like the one shown below appears 1134 finericanPopl finericanPop f All Clear f ute J Options Display Part R Rhythm B Bass A1 Accompaniment 1 A2 Accompaniment 2 A3 Accompaniment 3 Icon Function All Clear Deletes all of the settings You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions For more in mute formation take a look at Muting Parts for a particular division p 131 Clear Deletes the Styles in selected parts The Part Settings screen is displayed al lowing you to make detailed settings to Options each part For more information take a look at Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part p 132 Records the created Style to the Music Execute Style User button Touch this when you have finished creating the Style Selecting the Styles assigne
67. do not need the metronome sound press the The 16 track Sequencer screen appears Metronome button once more Tones for each part are assigned automatically gt When using song data that has already been recorded the recording is made using the source song s basic tempo To In some genres some parts may have no tone assigned i change the basic tempo of a song please refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 128 115 kn 2 6 o Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs O Step 2 Start Recording If necessary choose a recording method For more on how to record refer to p 116 If you record for the first time there s no need to select the recording method Selecting the Part to Record l Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 113 2 Touch the number for the Part you want to record The Part you touch appears in reverse video You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on Part D 10 or Part S 11 You can select drum sets or effect sounds by selecting Part D 10 or Part S 11 and touching Drum Set Selecting the sound to play 3 Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play After selecting a Tone touch Exit to call up the 16 Track Sequencer screen Recording the performance 4 Press the a Reset button Recording will start at the beginning of the song If you want to record from a point other than the beginning use the lt q Bwd and
68. even when Equalizer is pressed the indicator does not light up 2 Touch the Type icon to make your selection Display Explanation Bottom This setting greatly boosts the low end Power Boosts both the low and high frequency ranges Mild Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant sounding tone Clear This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling Bright This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant sparkling sound Flat All slider values are set to 0 User Store your own preferred settings p 31 3 Touch the slider to make adjustment Settings Displayed Value Description Low frequency range This is the range of frequen Low 60 0 60 cies for instruments like drums bass organ guitar and strings Mid low frequency range This is the range of fre 60 0 60 quencies for lower brass and woodwind instru ments 30 Chapter 1 Performance Settings ue Displayed Value Description Mid 60 0 60 Midrange This is the range of frequencies where most instrument sounds are concentrated Mid high frequency range The ear is most sensi 60 0 60 4 tive to this frequency range High 60 0 60 High frequency range These frequencies add bril liance to the sound You can temper the distortion in the sound by low Master Level 60 0 60 ering the level
69. hand and left hand parts to work well set on Auto then change the setting to 2 1 Part or 3 4 Part Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears J to switch the screens Touch lt Track Assign gt A screen like the one shown below appears Track Assion gp Exit Touch M o select the setting Display Explanation The part assigned to each track will be determined automatically Auto depending on the song data 2 1 Part Part 1 will be assigned to the right hand track part 2 to the left hand track and part 3 to the user track 3 4 Part Part 4 will be assigned to the right hand track part 3 to the left hand track and part 1 to the user track 4 a Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen After changing this setting try selecting the song once again For more detailed information about selecting a song refer to Playing a Song p 65 NEMb When you select this parameter the message OK to delete song may be displayed Refer to If the following screen appears p 90 vb This setting is effective with SMF format song data This is not effective with the internal songs e 2 ij 89 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance With the KF 7 you can easily record performances using the five track buttons A recorded
70. has dis appeared Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KF 7 is turned off or a song is selected A performance can not be restored once it s been deleted Be sure to save it ona floppy disk or User Memory be fore you turn off the power p 101 In the score screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed 163 saoipueddy un g D c 7 Q Q E Error Messages Indica Meaning Indica Meaning tion tion To protect the copyright this music file cannot be The internal memory capacity of the KF 7 is full Sorin saved as an SME Error 30 Save the song data on a floppy disk p 101 and Also the music file can not be saved If you want to delete the song or the User style data stored on the save it please save on the same floppy disk KF 7 memory Error 01 You can only read the music file It can not be saved The KF 7 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data on a floppy disk or user memory Error 40 sent from the external MIDI device Reduce the a amount of MIDI data sent to the KF 7 The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Pro Error 02 tect position p 6 Change it to the Write position Error 41 A MIDI cable or computer cable has been discon Repeat the procedure nected Connect it properly and securely This floppy dis
71. making any connections Turn the volume all the way down on the KF 7 and on the device you re about to connect Switch off the power to the KF 7 and the device you re about to connect Set the Computer switch on the rear panel to MIDI Use a MIDI cable sold separately to connect the MIDI connectors to each other Please refer to the connection examples below Switch on the power to the KF 7 and the connected device Adjust the volume level on the KF 7 and the connected device You should also set the MIDI settings as needed For details on the MIDI related settings refer to p 155 p 157 Connection Examples Setup with a MIDI Sequencer Roland MT Series Out MiDi in KF 7 Damper Sostenuto Soft P Liga TL Lg lono Stereo MIDI Pedal Line In Line Out When the KF 7 is connected to a MIDI sequencer set it to Local OFF Refer to Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal Sound Generator Local On Off p 156 Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module Sound Module MIDI THRU OUT IN KF 7 Damper Sostenuto Soft R L Mono MIDI Pedal Line In Line Out 154 Synchronizing with Connected MIDI Devices You can have connected MIDI devices played by the tempo produced by the KF 7 you can also have the tempo produced by connected MIDI devices play the KF 7 This setting is called the MIDI Sync Having connected MIDI devices wor
72. measure is called insertion Ex To insert measures bars 5 7 EERESES AEIR At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select lt Insert gt A screen like the one shown below appears Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be inserted For Number of measures to be inserted Track button or part number where data will be inserted Tr Pt When All is selected blank measures are in serted at the same place in all parts Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Transposing Individual Parts Transpose You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select lt Transpose gt A screen like the one shown below appears Transpose SS A screen like the one shown below appears Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be erased For Number of measures to be erased Track button or part number to be erased Tr Pt AT i i Item Content When All is selected the same portion of all parts is erased Measure number of the first measure of the From Select from the following types of performance segment to be transposed data to erase For Number of measures to be transposed A
73. more B Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard You can use Chords at the bottom right of the Chord Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen 1 Atthe Chord Sequencer screen touch Chords A screen like the one shown below appears Chord Selector Ese Bass 3 Touch Execute to enter the chord You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen Editing Songs There are many ways you can edit performances recorded using the KF 7 Track button or 16 track sequencer B Basic Operation of the Editing Functions While songs are being loaded the measure number in the upper right of the screen is highlighted text and background are inverted Start editing the song only after the measure number is no longer highlighted Selecting the editing function 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 Touch Song Edit A Song Edit screen like the following appears 3 Touch an editing function to select that function For more detailed information refer to the corresponding page for each function Function Description Page Undoes editing operations that uae have been performed podes Co Copies measures and internal p 122 py rhythm patterns p 123 Quantize Evens out sounds in recorded p 123 performances Delete Deletes measures p 124 Insert Insert
74. no sounds can be selected Select the transmit channel 1 16 of the KF 7 The channel setting is at 1 when the KF 7 is powered up If the keyboard has been split into right hand and left hand sections messages from the left hand section are fixed at 3 The KF 7 receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16 B Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard Local Control When connecting a MIDI sequencer set Local Control to OFF The setting is at Local Control ON when the KF 7 is powered up As illustrated information describing what has been played on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two different routes 1 and 2 As a result you hear overlapping or intermittent sounds To prevent this from happening route 1 must be disabled by setting the unit to what is known as Local Off 1 Local On Sequencer MIDI Sound IN Generator im MIDI iim ss 2 Soft Tru On Each note played is sounded twice 156 Local On The keyboard and internal sound generator are connected Sound is emitted t Sound Generator Local On 4 Will Local Off The keyboard and internal sound generator are 4 separated No sound will be produced by the keyboard when it is played No sound produced Sound Generator Local Off MN MI When connectin
75. others p 16 Line In Jacks You can connect audio equipment or other digital instruments and hear them through the KF 7 s speakers p 157 Line Out Jacks You can use these to play the notes from the KF 7 on an audio device or record what you play on a tape recorder p 157 Power Switch Pressed to switch the power on and off p 17 DC In Jack Connect the included AC adapter here p 16 Contents USING THE UNIT SAFELY a aana aaa TA ah NK a A NS 3 IMPORTANT NOTES ierit aana Egen ia 5 Introduction ses eae ene a aaa 7 Main Heatures aa a na ah aa Aa a ga NAN Ga Aa Ae aa a Na aaa A oe aa heen 7 How To Use This Manual seen 9 Conventions Used in This Manual sss 9 Panel Descriptions renes 10 Front Panel iere tette ket ee De arena ea E 10 Rear Panels an E nng naga agan paa mese ERN 12 Before You Start Playing 16 Installing the Music Stand Connect the Power Cord Connecting Pedals tinerei terrrrorieeda ienien rerit Turning the Power On and Off sss 17 Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance 18 Connecting Headphones sss 18 Connecting a Microphone sss 18 About the Touch Screen sse 19 Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen sss 19 Main Scre
76. play yourself The indicator of the button you pressed will blink and the KF 7 enters recording standby mode Only drum sets or SFX set are Since in this example we will record the right hand performance press the 4 recorded to the R Rhythm Upper button to make the button s indicator light blink button To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Start recording 5 Pressthe m Play Stop button A two bar count in plays then recording starts Even without pressing the W Play Stop button recording starts when you play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by playing the keyboard instead of pushing the W Play Stop button When recording starts the W Play Stop and amp Rec buttons indicators light Stop recording 6 Pressthe m Play Stop button Recording stops 95 t g Q o 9 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Listening to the recorded performance 7 Press the ma Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance is played back When you press the m Play Stop button recording stops Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings 96 When you want to re record specify the Track button for the performance you want to re record and then record again When you select a previously recorded Track button and re record everything
77. playing rather than pushing the m Play Stop button 91 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance When recording starts the W Play Stop and Rec buttons indicators light up Stop recording Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when 6 Press the m Play Stop button the power to the KF 7 is turned Recording stops off If you do not want a The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button performance deleted then save it to a floppy disk or to Listening to the Recorded Performance Favorites Refer to Saving Songs p 101 7 Press the a Reset button then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance is played back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops Track buttons assignments for recorded performances When you record only a keyboard performance the performance will be assigned to the track buttons as follows lt Normal performance playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Layer performance The performance is recorded to the 1 Whole button Split performance st kn 2 I U The left hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower button and the right hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Layer performance and Split performance The left hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 3 Lower
78. plays using the selected Tone MIDI Settings With the KF 7 you can make MIDI settings like those described below MIDI Setting Screen MD Setting ES Local Control Display Description Tx Channel Chooses the MIDI send channel p 156 Local Control Switches Local Control on or off p 156 Program Change Screen Program Change S 0 00h s r N Bank Select Program LSB Change Display Description Bank Select MSB Sends Bank Select MSB messages p 156 Bank Select LSB Sends Bank Select LSB messages p 156 Program Change Sends Program Change messages Program Numters p 156 155 a kn 2 6 U Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices Making the Settings 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt 3 Touch lt MIDI Setting gt or lt Program Change gt 4 Touch to make the setting for each item Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Functions screen B Selecting the Transmit Channel Tx Channel MIDI organizes things into channels which are numbered from 1 through 16 Simply connecting a cable is not enough for communication to take place The connected devices must be set to use the same MIDI channels Otherwise no sound will be produced and
79. select the copy destination for the song If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location the previously saved song will be erased If you don t want to erase a previously saved song choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column 7 Touch Execute Never turn off the power while the operation is in Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the copy is finished i progress Doing so will The song from the disk is copied to Favorites damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable 105 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance B Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Disks Songs that ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto floppy disks In this case in the Copy Song screen in Step 4 above touch the large arrow icon in the center to point the arrow upwards This sets the KF 7 to copy the song in Favorites to the floppy disk Copy Song E34 Ej Disk c Favorites 1 New Sono The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from floppy MEMD Some song data cannot co disks to Favorites 8 py because they are copy protected t g a lt 9 106 Chapter 5 User Program Registration Saving Performance Settings User Program Any collection of settings inclu
80. tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you speak into the microphone and the song begins Touch Exit to return to the Vocal Effects screen O Playing instrument sounds at vocal pitches Vocal Keyboard You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KF 7 s internal Tones 1 Touch Vocal Keyboard in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 Jazz Scat Strings Super Tenor Rich Choir EX Ac Guitar Flute 37 Chapter 1 Performance 2 Ifthe lt OFF gt icon is selected touch the lt ON gt icon MEMO When you play the keys while 3 Touch any of the icons to select a Tone using Vocal Keyboard the tone selected for Vocal You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button Keyboards played When you sing into the microphone the sung pitches are played using the selected Tone Cancelling the effect 4 a Touch lt OFF gt e g Q lt U The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Vocal Effects screen O Adding harmonies to a specified part Music Files When you sing while playing back a specified song data part the harmony is added using the pitches of the specified part 1 a Select the song to which you want to add harmony If selecting a song on a disk insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For more on how to select songs refer to Playing a Song p 65 2
81. the song s settings If recording a new song touch 0 Song Name to select 0 New Song Touch Cancel to discard the changes you re made B Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre WA e Tone Set ew Son Ir Gradus l Etude_op1 0 5 Tone Set is a function that automatically assigns the most 2 Fantaisielmp suitable tones for the selected musical style When you re creating a song you can assign Tone sets then change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song l Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 113 gt Ifa song has already been recorded or if the song s settings 2 Touch Tone Set in the lower part of the screen have been changed the OK to delete Song confirmation A screen like the one shown below appears prompt appears when you touch 0 Song Name For more information take a look at If the following screen appears p Tone Set SSS 90 Determining the song s beat and tempo 4 Press the Metronome button to select the beat p 40 You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded If you want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through the song take a look at Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map p 127 5 Press the Tempo and buttons to set the basic 3 Touch the screen to select a musical genre tempo of the song 4 Touch lt Exit gt If you
82. the song without inserting the floppy disk in the disk drive If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites the performance won t be erased when the power is turned off Some commercially available music files cannot be saved Preparations for Saving Data because they are copy When saving to floppy disks first check to make sure that the floppy disk s protect protected tab is set to the Write position p 99 then insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 1 a Press the Disk button MEMp 0 2 Touch lt Files If not handled with care a z floppy disk can be damaged EF 3 or the data on it become Touch Save corrupted making playback The following Save Song screen appears impossible We recommend saving your songs on two different floppy disks MEMD When you want to clear all of the content saved to the Favorites and restore the settings to the original factory condition refer to Formatting the User Memory p 151 101 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Determining the name of the song to be saved 4 a Touch Rename The following Rename screen appears gt F Rename SS _ 3 When you touch KJ When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input the character appears the cursor moves at the cursor location For example touching ABC in succession cycles you thr
83. then press the m Play Stop button The recorded performance plays back When you press the m Play Stop button playback stops MEMD If you select lt New Song gt when a song has already been recorded the OK to delete song prompt appears in the screen For more detailed information refer to If the following screen appears p 90 e 2 5 n MEMD You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance with Automatic Accompaniment To learn how see Changing How Recording Stops p 97 93 lt kn 2 6 o Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Track buttons assignments for recorded performances Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are assigned to the track buttons as shown below Track button Performance Recorded R Rhythm The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is recorded here In addition drum sets and effect sounds that are selected with the keys in a performance are re corded to this track 1 Whole When using Piano Style accompaniment p 62 the performance played on the keyboard is recorded here 2 Bass Accomp The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and accompaniment part are recorded here 3 Lower When the KF 7 is set so that sounds from performances on the left hand side of the keyboard are played while the Automatic Accompanim
84. to a connected MIDI device or computer When you turn on the power this is set to OFF data is not sent 1 Press the Menu button 2 Touch lt Composer MIDI Out gt Composer MIDI Out S o set ON or OFF 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen Connecting to Audio Equipment When you connect the KF 7 to audio equipment you can play the sounds from the KF 7 through the speakers on the audio equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device When connecting please use audio cables sold separately with standard phone plugs B Connectors L O L O NS L stereo Line In Line Out Output J acks You can connect audio equipment using audio cables sold separately and play the sounds from the KF 7 through the speakers on the connected equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device If the input of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack Input Jacks You can connect another sound source such as audio equipment or an electronic instrument using audio cables sold separately Play the sounds from the connected device through the speakers on the KF 7 If the input of the connected device is monaural you must use the L Mono jack B Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the pow
85. turn off the POWER switch then unplug the power cord from the power outlet For this reason the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cord s plug should be one that is within easy reach Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For further details refer to Before Using Floppy Disks p 6 Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong magnetic field e g loudspeakers nstall the unit on a solid level surface Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Al
86. when necessary by performing calibration repositioning At step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Touch Screen A screen like the one shown below appears ZERE Touch Screen zm Touch Execute below to start calibration Touch Execute Touch the points indicated Do this carefully because touching a location that s different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the displacement even worse Be sure to touch the pointer accurately When the calibration is finished touch Write to store the settings fyou don t write them to memory the calibration settings will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings If you touch Factory Reset in the above screen the touch screen calibration settings revert to the original factory settings Formatting the User Memory The KF 7 features an internal storage area where you can save recorded performances and User Styles This space is called the User Memory The following content is stored to the user memory Content registered to the Favorites p 68 e Sets of saved User Programs p 109 User Styles saved on user memory p 135 mage files set with the User Image settings p 149 To delete all of the content held in the user memory and restore the original factory settings carry out the following procedure l Press the
87. your work on floppy disk you need to format the floppy disk first p 99 The floppy disk was removed from the disk drive Error 13 while reading or writing was in progress Insert the floppy disk and repeat the procedure This floppy disk or user memory is damaged and Biota cannot be used Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure or format the user memory p 151 This song or music style cannot be read Please use a Roland SMF Music Files or Roland Digital Piano Error 15 compatible music files p 181 Also you can only use User Programs that have been saved with the KF 7 p 109 The KF 7 cannot read the floppy disk or user mem Error 18 ory quickly enough Press the gt W Play Stop TOUT button then press the Hd Reset button and gt W Play Stop button to play the song The selected image data cannot be displayed You Error 17 will need to prepare image data that can be used with the KF 7 p 149 164 Tone List Piano Grand Piano1 PianoStrings Piano Choir Tremolo Dyno Jazzy Vib Gt Suitcase Vibraphone Harpsi Doubl Marimba Steel Drums Honky Tonk Stage Rhodes Ballad Piano Wurly Dyno Rhodes Rock Piano Honky tonk 2 Clav Harpsi Singl Harpsichord UprightPiano Grand Piano2 Bell Piano Piano Oohs Bright Piano E Grand MIDI Piano1 E Piano 1 St FM EP FM SA EP Hard FM EP Harpsi o Coupled Hps Soft Marimba EG Rhodes 1 EG Rhodes 2 Hard Rhodes Vibra Bells Celesta
88. 1 808 Bass Drum 2 Std Kick 1 Kick 1 JE 908 Rim Shot 808 Rim Shot Side Stick Side Stick 38 808 Snare Drum TR 909 Snr Snare Drum 1 Brush Tap LEE Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Brush Slap 40 Snare Drum 2 Dance Snr 2 Snare Drum 2 Brush Swirl 41 808 Low Tom 2 808 Low Tom 2 Low Tom 2 Brush Low Tom 2 WEH 808 CHH EXC1 808 CHH EXC1 Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat2 EXC1 43 808 Low Tom 1 808 Low Tom 1 Low Tom 1 Brush Low Tom 1 L 50s CHH EXC1 808 CHH EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 2 EXC1 45 808 Mid Tom 2 808 Mid Tom 2 Mid Tom 2 Brush Mid Tom 2 EN 808 OHH EXC 808 OHH EXC1 Open Hi hat 1 EXC1 OpenHihat2 EXC1 808 Mid Tom 1 808 Mid Tom 1 Mid Tom 1 Brush Mid Tom 1 48 808 Hi Tom 2 808 Hi Tom 2 High Tom 2 Brush Hi Tom 2 E 908 Cymbal 808 Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 808 Hi Tom 1 808 Hi Tom 1 High Tom 1 Brush Hi Tom 1 BH Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal 53 Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell EE Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal EE 508 Cowbell 808 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 EH Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo E Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo 62 808 High Conga 808 High Conga Mute H
89. 111 Chapter 5 User Program Registration B Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers You can have PC Program Change numbers be transmitted to an external MIDI device when you switch the User Program on the KF 7 You can register PC number settings to each of the User Programs just as you can with button settings and other settings preferences Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set 1 Press the User Program button then touch the name of the performance setting you want to set Setting the Transmission of the PC 2 Touch lt PC Set gt in the User Program screen The following type of screen appears gt SS PD Settins SSS Meine Bank Select Bank Select Program MSB LSB Change 3 Touch 1j Rd for the parameter and make the settings Display Description This prevents the PC number from being Tx PC BN Channel transmitted Off or sets the transmission channel Channel 1 16 Bank Select LSB Sets the Bank Select LSB Bank Select MSB Sets the Bank Select MSB Program Sets the Program Change messages Pro Change gram Numbers 4 Touch Exit The User Program screen returns to the display Touch Write to save the setting to the User Program For more detailed information refer to Saving Performance Settings User Program p 107 112 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Multitrack Recording wi
90. 16 17 The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons numbered 11 13 Music Style buttons Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment p 50 Pressing the User button selects a User Style that you ve made yourself or a Music Style on floppy disk p 51 Fill In buttons Inserts a fill in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the accompaniment pattern p 57 To Variation button To Original button Intro Ending button Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment p 54 Start Stop button Starts and stops automatic accompaniment p 54 Rhythm Partner 18 19 20 21 Metronome button Activates the built in metronome p 40 You can change the count sound settings p 146 Beat Indicator This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected song or accompaniment Rhythm button Plays the Rhythm pattern p 44 Tempo buttons Adjusts the tempo Press the and buttons at the same time to return to the original tempo Panel Descriptions 23 24 T 30 31 37 39 40 00 000000 O 60000 O fh concer Needs 2 n i E 2 OO OOOOO ne Touch Program Reset Play Stop Rec Bwd Fwd n NEST 25 26 27 28 3233343536 38 22 Main Buttons Record Playback See the Quick Start 30 Menu button 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Select Listen to a Song Disk b
91. 3 Touch Style Converter The Style Converter screen appears 4 Touch lt Conv Mode gt then use the buttons or the dial to switch the mode to Manual This makes the setting for the Manual mode After that the steps are the same as for Creating Styles in Auto Mode p 133 When you touch Play in the lower part of the screen you can listen to the performance of the part selected with Options O Changing an Extracted Part You can extract and change part of a song created with 16 track sequencer 1 Atthe Style Converter screen touch Options A screen like the one shown below appears SS S e Part fission SS a Rhuthn ficconp 3 2 Touch the performance Part with settings you want to change 3 Use the buttons and the dial to specify which 16 track Sequencer performance part you want to extract gt In the Manual mode the type of chords appear at the bottom of the screen Set the Parts for all chords 4 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Style Converter screen Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles Saving a User Style You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks or to the user memory When saved to the user memory User Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off You can also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the Music Style User button You can save up to 99 User
92. 44 or when using the practice function you can use the dial to adjust the tempo Turn the dial clockwise to speed up the tempo Turn the dial counterclockwise to slow the tempo 77 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Tap Tempo You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad This feature is called Tap Tempo By using the Tap Tempo function you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of without specifying the tempo in numerical terms Basic Advanedi Advanced Full 0000 Function Assigning functions to the Performance Pads 1 Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up Z User Pad Setting Ese Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 MEMO You can also assign the Tap Tempo function to the pedal and use the pedal to specify the tempo For details refer to Assigning Functions to 2 Touch M or the Performance Pad to which the function is Pedals and Performance Pads 1 44 mM assigned then select Tap Tempo Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 3 Touch Exit the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen Specifying the Tempo 4 a Press the Pad to which Tap Tempo is assigned at least twice The tempo is set to the rhythm you used when tapping the button 78 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions E Use Your Voice to Selec
93. 46 Erasingi capud E AAAA N SEa aA Seeds KE I 83 Moving sesa nanda adan nng ec en I aaa aaa dagane 83 Pl cing sasa aana oi anna teed che eves Kang a eaaa D iid 82 Repeat Anan ag een A aaa Bore edes 84 Master Tuning teer metes 148 Melody Intelligence eeeeeeee anane nn nana anan 60 Melody Intelligence button see 60 Memory Backup ence eee 150 Metronome 1 32 22 E PA a TE NE RA 40 AMINATION reed egere a coche Pues iga ap ea anggana ei 43 Beat sanan an tiie ngen ete edes 41 P ttern i21 aede se Redes neng aaa ga a atelier 43 SOU KENE NAN tert NG A AG KN 42 Vol me 5c eniti 42 Metronome button aa aw Ta wa aa aaa enne 40 MITG Sa ee Lang NAN aaa a ag anggan RUM T NI LU Qs5 Microphone 2 12 nete eite aaa kaa 18 MIDP e RA 153 MID Connector o 2 2 nete tere erre 153 MIDI De vices reris eene eene eee oe donus 153 MIDI Ensemble neret edades 155 MIDESettingsz ettet detiene 155 MIDI SYNG x creer terit te etes 154 Minus One stie teet ao tee etel ee E cove eee eaaet 81 Mix Recording sasab eee eerte perennes 117 Multitrack Recording nee 113 Music Assistant button sse QS 10 Musie Files 34 i coe ero te eire e eve ied n 38 Mu sicStyle i KA NGANG NIN A AN TA TA raiki 46 On Disk sasa sesi teret ad aaa ag aa a nee alee coe tera kak 51 Rhythm Pattern eere reete 53 Music Style Buttons 8 ended asek aana ts 50 Music Style Fist ee ete rne 173 Mut
94. 7 DRUMS renn 5 I a e e EE een et QS 5 TIADA esse ee ERG IERI QS 14 22 E Eclio EN WAN KH AN eed o enia te 34 Editing endete Ane 121 Bff cts ne ni Roue ee e te egens 32 Effects List 2 ene estet era ied 172 Eject button eere ette tee nre dme 99 Ending euet tete ree terere reus 46 55 Equalizer senora rene eerte etes 30 Equalizer button irt m Ree enr 30 Erase Song Edit zu kaa aa nag aaa apapa Ree 125 Erasing Performance on specific tracks sese 97 Recorded performance sse 97 Error Messages oreet vette peers 164 EXDOLU hte ete E n eerie O 73 185 Index F Factory ReSet tise aga erret e D 150 Factory Setting Touch SETGEN 1 2 niea o tdt anga anana 151 User Memory aaa saa naa hs aves gag aan 151 Favorites sende NGA aaah AE A WI nag 68 101 Reeisteritig sasa necat onia asinan eit baga dawan tans 68 Removing aaa Na eaaa naa paka aaa ees 69 Pa Tin esate idea ARA eb e ee aiia 57 Fill Ii To Original i e cemere 46 Fill In To Variation sasarane ak ana ias ginanda dan ana panan ng ii 46 Finger Numbers asii sireno tenues bisection nb eaaa aana ban 72 Floppy Disk anes eeu ete Merde tees 99 Footage araga annya nag gan tent Ba Ba pa aa alia QS 15 Format Floppy disks sasare area anang a nan etre eee eee 99 Functions 2i dente E Pe e sace 138 141 Ew d button ore os ete rre ee eee ed 66 G GAME inde a eteie Ta aided QS 5 General MIDI aereos oeii sertes esa ede ag eee Pee de
95. 7 and save them to floppy disks You can also use saved image data to your computer Insert the floppy disk onto which you want to save the image data in the KF 7 s disk drive Use a floppy disk formatted on the KF 7 For more on formatting disks refer to p 99 Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song Press the Score Display button The Score screen appears Touch lt Option gt Touch lt Export gt A screen like the one shown below appears or each parameter to set the range of the image data Touch lt Execute gt The score is saved to the floppy disk as image data in BMP bitmap format Other than for your own personal enjoyment use of the scores that are output without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law Do not remove the floppy disk while save is in progress 73 e 2 ij m g Q lt s Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Practicing Songs with the Practice Function 4 Try using the KF 7 s practice function to practice a song you like This feature makes it simple to specify the segment you want for repeated practice check your own performance against the score and practice at a slower tempo O 1 Displaying the Score Screen Selecting the song 1 Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select the song you want to practice For more on how to select songs refer t
96. 9 Connecting External Devices You can connect the KF 7 to external devices such as audio equipment and MIDI instruments O Connecting MIDI Devices p 153 You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance data from the KF 7 or play performance data from the KF 7 on the sequencer Also when you connect a MIDI sound module you can perform on the KF 7 and hear the sounds played through the MIDI sound module O Connecting Audio Equipment p 157 The KF 7 has high quality built in stereo speakers but you can also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive sound You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording equipment and record your performances O Connecting a Computer p 158 You can use a sequencer program such as Roland Visual MT to record performance data from the KF 7 and play performance data from the program on the KF 7 Connecting MIDI Devices By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data you can control one device from the other For instance you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument What s MIDI MIDI short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface was developed as a universal standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers The KF 7 is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer connector to let it exchange performance data with external device
97. 998 Roland Corporation Entertainer 1994 Roland Corporation Greensleeves 1993 Roland Corporation Hallelujah 1993 Roland Corporation Jingle Bells 1998 Roland Corporation Les patineurs Valse 1998 Roland Corporation Little Brown Jug 1998 Roland Corporation Marchin In 1992 Roland Corporation Silent Night Holy Night 1998 Roland Corporation Stagecoach 1994 Roland Corporation EZ Classical Air sul G 1993 Roland Corporation Fantasie impromptu op 66 2001 Roland Corporation Grande valse brillante 1995 Roland Corporation Gymnopedie 1 1997 Roland Corporation Liebestraume 3 2001 Roland Corporation Mondschein 1994 Roland Corporation Nocturne 9 2 1996 Roland Corporation Petit chien 2001 Roland Corporation Prelude28 15 1996 Roland Corporation Traumerei 1996 Roland Corporation TurkishMarch 1996 Roland Corporation Ungarische Tanze V 1996 Roland Corporation un g D c 7 Q Q E 176 Internal Song List Practice The Hunt 1999 Roland Corporation TenderFlower 1999 Roland Corporation Shepherdess 1999 Roland Corporation Farewell 1999 Roland Corporation Consolation 1999 Roland Corporation AustrianDance 1999 Roland Corporation Ballad 1999 Roland Cor
98. A screen like the one shown below appears JESE User Pad Setting EREE Fade In Out Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 2 Touch Performance Pads to assign functions to each of the O Functions that can be assigned Pedals Performance Pads Function Explanation Toggles the Leading Bass function on or off The function stays on as long as the pedal to Leading which this is assigned is pressed Bass When assigned to a Performance Pad this is alternately switched on and off each time the pad is pressed Only the accompaniment s rhythm part is played The next time you specify a chord No Chord with the keyboard the No Chord function is cancelled and all of the accompaniment parts are played During the performance of Automatic Break Accompaniment the accompaniment stops for one measure only Fill In To Performs the same function as the Fill In To Variation Variation button p 57 Fill In To Performs the same function as the Fill In To Original Original button p 57 Fill In A fill in is inserted but the accompaniment pattern after that doesn t change g This plays a fill in half a measure long then Half Fill In Rare pane switches to the Variation accompaniment Variation pattern This plays a fill in half a measure long then Half Fill In j es go switches to the Original accompaniment Original pattern Original Th
99. As re erae eue 96 With Accompaniment sese 93 Repeat etes eue eae Ants 84 Replace Recording eee 117 Replays nens unas uen ID S 70 Rese t D ttOn arret e er rere ed ene etd 66 Resonance 2 ut ee ete eoi eet eed ate etit tee an en SANE 138 Restoring the Factory Settings sese 150 INS HR a 27 Reverb button sana aaa an aaa an iang Nagi aaa aaa aa 27 Rey thai ze ek a Mabe AAS apaa e A aa Pan aan ba 44 Beat rene a na ag aaa Ga Da Re hig a iets 44 AA LET na MA ihe t tee eti epic a 45 Rhythm b tton te reed 44 Rhythm Partner sieis sasana na apa nagan bika dadan AN nangen ah kanng 40 Rhythm Pattern List sas eere a sana apaa aa gaga akak 179 Right hand tones reete NAN TEN aa ga a aee 24 ROOtNOtC acces eee BA a A NR ege 48 Rotary effect ede rere 144 187 S SAVING sre tete drerit tete vec e een 101 Compatibility eerie teet 103 User Style 55e ecd uen As US HUC 135 orao iot eet de dite dee ga ped cesa aere page eed eda ree eed seam 70 Saving as image data sss 73 Settingsvuiie eiie delito tube o or eet Ss sitet 72 Score Display button sse QS 8 70 Screens 16 track Sequencer screen sse 113 Advanced 3D screen 5 iere ees 28 Basie SCEeGT cns deett eee e te e aaa daaa 19 47 Chord Sequencer screen sse 120 Copy Song screen sseseeeeeeee eene 105 Copy Style Screeti 2 5 tete eet nei 137 Copy User Programs screen
100. Beat 2 16 Beat 2 8 Beat 3 16 Beat 3 When you touch lt Exit gt the Rhythm sound continues to play as you return to the y y Play asy previous screen Stopping the Rhythm 2 Press the Rhythm button once more and the indicator light goes out B Changing the Rhythm settings MEMD Depending on the beat there O Changing the Rhythm may be only one Rhythm to choose form 1 Touch a Rhythm name on the Rhythm screen The selected Rhythm plays The Rhythms available for selection will depend on the beat Touch J to switch the screens and show other choices MEM For more on the Rhythm types O Changing the beat of Rhythm refer to the Rhythm Pattern List p 179 1 Inthe Rhythm screen touch Beat The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Choose the beat by touching your choice You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices by touching 44 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the volume The rhythm volume can be adjusted to ten different levels 1 On the Rhythm screen touch Volume The available choices for volume level appear at the bottom of the screen 2 a Select a volume icon When you touch KJ other volume levels the selection moves to the side allowing you to access I 491deu5 1 ah D Choosing u sets the volume to the lowest level and choosing i sets it to the highest level
101. Disk button Even when you press the Music Style User button User Disk screen or the User Program button the rest of the procedure is the same 2 Touch File Touch Format User Memory A screen like the one shown below appears Z Format User Memory Exp Formats the User memory Favorite Songs Music Styles User Programs User images and other data saved in User memory will be completely erased Do you want to proceed f Cancel J 4 Touch lt OK gt All of the content in the user memory is deleted If you touch lt Cancel gt the deletion is cancelled and you re returned to the previous screen Never turn off the power while the display indicates Executing Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable gt Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings e 2 E xo 8 co other than the user memory settings To restore settings other than those for the user memory to the original factory settings carry out Factory Reset p 150 151 0 kn E 2 I o Chapter 8 Various Settings Automatically Starting the Quick Tour You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts automatically with no operation required 1 Hold down the Wonderland Game button and press the Part Balance button The Quick Tour screen appears 2 Touch Option futo Start Setting SEEE emo starts
102. Footsteps2 Boys Amen EE Applause Boys Amen 59 Door Creaking Boys Amen Door Boys Amen M o Scratch Boys Amen 62 Wind Chimes Boys Amen NE Car Engine Boys Amen 64 Car Stop Boys Amen 65 Car Pass Boys Amen 66 Car Crash Ole 67 Siren Ole Train Ole 69 Jetplane Ole EO Helicopter Ole 71 Starship Ole Gun Shot Ole gag Machine Gun Ole 74 Lasergun Ole E Explosion Ole 76 Dog Ole m Horse Gallop Ole E Birds Yeah 79 Rain Yeah E Thunder Yeah 81 Wind Yeah KE Seashore Yeah 83 Siream Yeah Bubble Yeah P E Cat Yeah 86 Bird Yeah E BabyLaughing Yeah 88 Boeeeen Yeah 89 Glass amp Glam Yeah E Ice Ring Woo 91 Crack Bottle Woo EA Pour Bottle Woo 93 Car Horn Woo a R Crossing Woo SLi Woo C796 SL2 Woo E Sea Woo 98 Fancy Animal Woo LEM Elephant Woo 100 Bike Woo 101 Car Engine 2 Woo gt BIA Small Club Ichi 3 103 Ni 8 e San 105 Shi o 7 171 un S D c 7 Q Q E Display Description Display Description Applies a light chorus effect with slow Overdrive Applies both overdrive and chorus GS Chorus 1 undulations Chorus effects GS Chorus 2 Applies a light chorus effect with guick Overdrive Applies both overdrive and flanger undulations gt Flanger effects Appli d h ffect with sl Applies both dri d del GS Chorus 3 pp lesa eep chorus effect with slow Overdrive gt Delay pplies both overdrive an elay undulations eff
103. Glockenspiel Soft E Piano 60 s E Piano E Piano 2 Xylophone Music Box Balafon Detuned EP 1 Detuned EP 2 Hard E Piano Hard Clav Soft Clav Reso Clav Phase Clav Pop Vibe Pop Celesta Tubular bell Santur Kalimba Air Grand Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 Organ Jazz Organ Full Organ 1 Lower Organ Theater Org Diapason 8 Bandneon Perc Organ Full Organ 2 Lower Organ2 Church Organ Rock Organ1 Blues Harp Pop Organ L Organ Trem Flute Accordion Nason fit 8 Organ Flute Jazz Organ2 Jazz Organ3 Jazz Organ4 CheeseOrgan Full Organ 3 Full Organ 4 Rotary Org S Rotary Org F Rock Organ2 Pipe Org Bs Organ Bass Metalic Org VS Organ Organ 1 Organ 2 Digi Church Guitar Bass EX Ac Guitar Flamenco Gtr Steel Guitar Jazz Guitar Requint Gtr 12str Guitar Nylon Steel Nylon Guitar Mandolin Gut Guitar Acoustic Bs A Bass Cymbl JC E Guitar DistortionGt Rock Rhythm Rock Rhythm2 Overdrive Gt Power Guitar Power Gt 2 Muted Dis Gt Fingered Bs Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass Steel Vox Muted Gt Muted Gt 2 Mellow Gt 5th Dist Feedback Gt2 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 SynthBass101 Jungle Bass Modular Bass WireStr Bass ResoSH Bass SH101 Bass Mute PickBs Mr Smooth Open Hard Dazed Guitar Acid Guitar Hawaiian Gt Ukulele Banjo Koto Shamisen Strings Velo Strings Dolce Strings SlowStrings2 Tremolo Str Suspense Str EX Orchestra Choir Str Harp Strings Warm Strings Violin
104. LAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorghehi
105. Marker A is moved to the beginning of the first measure and Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure Touch D gt to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B to the beginning of the thirteenth measure Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A Marker A Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 n 12 13 14 15 16 EE RN A A Marker A Marker B B Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over You can play back a particular passage over and over This is convenient when you want to focus on a passage 1 First set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to repeat For instance suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through eighth measures over and over You should place Marker A at the beginning of the fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar J 138 Sonate 2 Touch Repeat in the Marker screen The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B When you play the song the marked section of music plays back repeatedly Cancelling repeat playback 3 Touch Repeat in the Marker screen so it s highlighted in black Repeat playback is cancelled 84 NEMD When lt Repeat gt is On If neither Marker A nor Marker B is set the song is played back from the beginning to the end If you only place marker A playback repeats from marker A to the end of the song
106. Phrase button 4 48 aaa naa pa ama a naga Nan aa Aa a a 59 Pi no5 i bio ene obi ed ib t de ete Na 20 Piano Sereen rn arser ieste GEN GE aaa eag atra eae edad 19 lae a A NA AN A KANA euet m cce 98 Pitches 45295 aen e eH Re e P TRI a 72 Play Mode nges se tn os emeret ee 87 Play Stop button 5 255 5 2 ere ere ere 66 Playing sasana aaa eaaa a a ngaes aan GA na ag AN ga aaa 65 All of the internal songs see e 66 At a fixed tempo Tempo Mute see 79 Ircfandom 4 2 2 Rae ai fete reel tis cete eles 66 Repeat uetus cetus eee 84 Song on floppy disk sss 65 Power Cord 5 1 S cie oe eite HE EES 16 Power On and Off ennt eee Here Tak naa ngga 17 Practice Function esses eeeeeee eene enne entente nenne 74 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start Preset 5 aee o dtt ada eite 50 Program Change 2 22 ede kapas aenak Gan k kahi 156 Protecttab ii eee eee RE ee ee a eee 99 PU PickUp eiiieaen onde etti 98 Punch in Recording eese 119 Q Quantize Song Edit sess 123 Quick Tour Automatically starting 152 R Rec Mode ue eso re niente ese dear 97 116 Record Playback Buttons ccccscssseessseseeseseeesseteeseenes 66 Recording i nete eee eer E ia aserre 90 16 Track Sequencer eene 115 A TOW SONG nieve uito tetris 91 Along with a Song seseseeee eee 95 Redoing recordings sess 96 Track buttons 3 nee E
107. Pull EXC7 31 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks a2 Square Click Square Click Square Click Square Click 33 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click E Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell gt Sid Kick 2 Kick Std Kick 2 Std Kick 2 C236 Kick 1 Room Kick MONDO Kick Elec BD 37 Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick 38 Std Snr 1 Room Snr 1 Gated SD Elec SD NEM Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap 40 Std Snr 2 Std Snr 1 Snare Drum 2 Gated SD 41 Low Tom 2 Room Low Tom 2 Room Low Tom 2 Elec Low Tom 2 E Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 Closed Hi hat 1 EXC1 43 Low Tom 1 Room Low Tom 1 Room Low Tom 1 Elec Low Tom 1 44 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 Pedal Hi hat 1 EXC1 45 Mid Tom 2 Room Mid Tom 2 Room Mid Tom 2 Elec Mid Tom 2 EN Open Hi hat 1 EXC1 OpenHi hat 1 EXC1 Open Hi hat 4 EXC1 Open Hi hat 1 EXC1 Mid Tom 1 Room Mid Tom 1 Room Mid Tom 1 Elec Mid Tom 1 C3l48 High Tom 2 Room Hi Tom 2 Room Hi Tom 2 Elec Hi Tom 2 E Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 High Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 1 Room Hi Tom 1 Elec Hi Tom 1 LEO Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Reverse Cymbal 53 Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell EEE Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Spl
108. Roland Digital Intelligent Piano KF 7 Owner s Manual Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2002 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices NWARNING N CAUTION Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual AN e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its Q AC adaptor Do not
109. Slow Strings Cello St Harp DecayStrings Legato Str Strings Oct Strings PizzicatoStr Mellow Pizz Bell Strings Orchestra OrchestraHit Warm JP Str Slow Violin Contrabass Timpani Syn Strings1 Syn Strings2 Syn Slow Str Strings 2 JP Saw Str OB Strings Euro Hit 6th Hit Bass Hit Philly Hit Sax Brass Super Tenor EX Tenor Sax Sax Section Romantic Tp TromboneSoft AltoSax Tp Flute Soprano Sax Clarinet MutedTrumpet Oboe Flugel Horn Power Brass St Brass ff AltoSax Soft English Horn EX Tp amp Shake BrassSection Bs Clarinet Tenor Sax f Brite Brass Brass ff OrchestraBrs Grow Sax Baritone Sax Alto Sax EX Trumpet Tp Shake Tenor Sax GS Bari Sax SuperF Horns Fr Horn Solo Jump Brass Soft Brass DeepSynBrass Trombone Trombone 2 Tuba Piccolo Pan Flute GS Pan Flute Blow Pipe Bottle Blow BottleBlow2 Bassoon Recorder Trumpet French Horn Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 Shakuhachi Brass 1 Brass 2 Ocarina Voice Boys Choir Kid s Choir Jazz Scat Rich Choir Holy Voices Jz Scat Vib Opera Voice Jz Scat Doet Humming Dreamy Choir Doos Voice Doot Accent Dat Accent Bop Accent Thum Voice HollowReleas Choir Oohs VoiceAah Fem Choir Aahs Warm SqrPad New Age Pad Sugar Key LM PureLead LM Square JP SuperSaw Natural Lead 2600 SubOsc SquareWave2 Org Bells Oohs Chord Fantasia Crystal Harpvox CC Solo Vox Sweep Brightness Syn Square JP8 Square FM Lead FM Lead 2 M
110. Stop 128 tj Ra to select lt Tempo gt This makes the setting for tempo recording 3 Touch the lt Rec Mode gt Touch lt Exit gt a number of times to switch to the screen where the measure number is indicated in the upper right of the screen When the KF 7 goes into Tempo Recording the tempo indication is highlighted in white Recording the Tempo 4 Use the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move slightly before the measure where you want to change the tempo 5 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KF 7 is put in recording standby 6 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording begins 7 When you get to the place where you want to change the tempo use the Tempo and buttons or the dial to vary the tempo as desired 8 When you press the W Play Stop button recording stops The song s tempo changes You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 116 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Adjusting the Tempo ata Particular Measure You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected measure This is handy when you want to make a sudden change in tempo First carry out Steps 1 3 of Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 128
111. Stop Rec Settings for recording performances 1 Press One Touch Program Piano button 2 Decideon the tone of the performance Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone When you have finished choosing the settings touch Exit to display the Basic Screen Recording settings 3 a Pressthe 6 Rec button e 2 5 n You press the amp Rec button and the following messages will appear when a song has already been recorded MEMO If you select lt New Song gt when a song has already been recorded the OK to delete song prompt appears in the Do you want to record a nev song or add on to the current song screen For more detailed information refer to If the following screen appears p 90 Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KF 7 to the settings required for recording a new song The KF 7 is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 4 Decide on the tempo and beat If necessary press the Metronome button to play the metronome When you have finished making the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Start recording 5 Press the m Play Stop button A two bar count in plays then recording starts Even without pressing the m Play Stop button recording starts when you play the keyboard There is no count in played when you start by
112. Styles in user memory What is the User Memory The user memory is the area within the instrument where User Styles created with the KF 7 sets of User Programs and other such data are stored You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks Data saved to the user memory is not deleted even when the KF 7 s power is turned off gt When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user memory and restore the settings to its factory settings refer to Formatting the User Memory p 151 Preparations for saving data When saving to a floppy disk first insert a floppy disk in the disk drive 1 Press the Music Style User button A User Style screen like the following appears 0 finericanPopl If the User Style screen is not displayed touch User Disk in the lower part of the screen 2 Touch File 3 Touch Save A Save Style screen like the following appears Save Style SRE Rename Determining the name of the Style to be saved 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears the cursor moves When you touch When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each
113. The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal if Pedal EX1 4 is assigned to more than one pedal gt Using the Bend Up or Bend Down function during a split performance p 24 changes the pitch of sounds in the right hand side of the keyboard Additionally the range in which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is called the bend range refer to Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting p 145 Chapter 8 Various Settings B Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a played note is called the bender effect With the KF 7 you can assign the bender function to a pedal then apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal You can also make a setting that determines how much the pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender The maximum range of change in pitch is called the bend range At Step 3 Procedure p 141 touch Pedal Setting EEEE Pedal Setting ssp T Sostenuto Pedal Bend Ranae to adjust the bend range Touch Bend Range setting You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 in half tone steps up to one octave B Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are played and how the keys are pressed to specify chords What are the Chord Tone and Bass T
114. a song on floppy disk may result in performance data with too many notes causing some notes to drop out The sound is strange Sounds are heard twice doubled when the keyboard is played Is the KF 7 in layer play p 24 When the KF 7 is connected to an external se quencer set it to the Local OFF mode p 156 Alternatively the sequencer could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF 161 gt 5 6 5 2 8 un 9 o 2 2 lt Troubleshooting Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song is off Have you set transpose p 85 Are the settings for the Temperament and Stretch Tuning correct p 139 Is the setting for the Master Tune correct p 148 Effects cannot be applied to Tones It s not possible to apply more than one effect at the same time so when a performance has been recorded on multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as it s played back the desired effect may not be applied Anote doesn t stop playing Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been changed p 145 Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded continuously A High pitched whine is produced When listening through headphones Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones feature an ample high end compo nent which may make the sound appear to have metallic r
115. aa a a aaa a nan aaa An aaa naa a aaa aaa aaa 165 Drum S t List sasasi ede eoa a aaa anana daana 167 SEX SOULASE sic a anandang REPE Rete 171 Effects ISt 3 re oie OH em n 172 Music Style List 173 Chord List ete he bee pi ted 174 Internal S ng List sesarengan ag an eter ees 176 Rhythm Pattern List 179 Parameters Stored to Internal Memory Music Files That the KF 7 Can Use 181 The KF 7 allows you to use the following music files 181 About the KF 7 Sound Generator sssssssss 181 MIDI Implementation Chart sssssssssseseeeene 182 Main Specifications siei 183 le lt gt ee eee 185 15 32 O ya gt oS Lo E Before You Start Playing Installing the Music Stand 1 Using the supplied screws attach the music stand to the back of the KF 7 as illustrated Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the music stand Turn the screws clockwise until they re held in place but don t tighten them yet 2 Put the music stand between the screws and the KF 7 s body 3 While supporting the music stand with one hand secure it in place by turning the screws When attaching the music stand support it firmly with one hand to make sure that you don t drop it Be careful so you don t get your fingers pinched Do not apply excessive force to the installed music stand 4 To remove the music stand support it with one hand while loose
116. abass Trem Str PizzicatoStr GS Harp Timpani GS Strings Orchestra GS SI Str Syn Strings1 Syn Strings2 Syn Strings3 Choir Aahs 166 Choir Pop Voice SynVox OrchestraHit GS Trumpet Trombone Trombone 2 Tuba MutedTrumpet French Horn Fr Horn 2 Brass 1 Brass 2 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 Synth Brass3 Synth Brass4 AnalogBrass1 AnalogBrass2 GS Sop Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax GS Bari Sax GS Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo GS Flute Recorder GS Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave Square Sine Wave Saw Wave Saw Doctor Solo Syn Calliope Chiffer Lead Charang Solo Vox 5th Saw Wave Bass amp Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Polysynth Space Voice Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Star Theme Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto Taisho Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Castanets Taiko Concert BD Melo Tom 1 Melo Tom 2 Synth Drum 808 Tom Elec Perc Reverse Cym Gt FretNoise Gt Cut Noise String Slap Breath Noise FI Key Click Seashore Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Bird Dog Horse Gallop Bird 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 DoorCreaking Door Scratch Windchime Helicopter Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Applause Laughing Screaming Punch He
117. age displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings p 141 When you touch Functions on the Piano screen the parameters for the piano performance settings continue into the second page p 138 A Functions screen like the following appears 3 Functions SS Master Tune MDI Ensemble Language Opening Message Parameter Description Master Tune Sets the KF 7 s standard pitch p 148 banatigee Selects the language used in the guag display p 148 Opening Sets the message that appears when Message the power is turned on p 148 MIDI Ensemble Refer to p 155 User Image Selects the image data and display Display used p 149 MIDI Settings Refer to p 155 Program Change Refer to p 155 Beat Indicator Remains the beat indicator off at all times p 150 MIDI Sync Refer to p 154 Memory Backup Stores the edited settings and other data to the KF 7 p 150 Factory Reset Restores the content stored with Memory Backup to the original factory settings p 150 Touch Screen Allows for calibration of the touch screen p 151 147 e 2 EY D g o L1 2 6 o Chapter 8 Various Settings 3 Touch the name of the parameter you want to set Refer to the corresponding page for each function 4 Touch Exit to return to the
118. ailable Consult your KF 7 dealer when purchasing music files Refer to Music Files That the KF 7 Can Use p 181 I 491deu5 MEMD You can stop lyrics from being displayed Refer to Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics p 88 39 Chapter 1 Performance Using the Metronome and Rhythm Rhythm Partner e During playback of a song or W when performing with The KF 7 features a built in metronome Additionally you can have Rhythm automatic accompaniment the patterns play in the same manner as the metronome just by pressing the Rhythm sound of the m tronom Keeps button time with the beat of the song The combination of the internal metronome and rhythm functions is called Rhythm or accompaniment Partner e g Q lt U B Using the Metronome 1 Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up NEMD Y illh h It is not possible to use the SHORTS E SUNG metronome and rhythm p 44 The following Metronome screen appears simultaneously J 108 New Song You can touch lt Exit gt to have the metronome continue to play while you return to the previous screen Stopping the metronome 2 Press the Metronome button once more and the indicator light goes out 40 Chapter 1 Performance B Changing the Metronome Settings O Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the tempo of the metronome The tempo of the metronome ch
119. al Effect 3 When you touch lt Exit gt the effect is applied and you return to the 4 a Press the Vocal Effect button and watch the indicator light go out The Vocal Effect function is cancelled O Adjusting the Echo Echo 1 Touch Echo in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 SS gt Eu Min Echo Tupe Maz 2 Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal 3 Touch the Echo Type 1 or 2 to change the echo type Displayed Description 1 Adds basic reverberations 2 Adds reverberations for a karaoke type echo Touch Exit to return to the Vocal Effects screen 34 Chapter 1 Performance O Altering Vocals Transformer NEM With the KF 7 you can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone When you use the Voice This is called the Voice Transformer function Transformer function the resonance setting for the piano see p 138 may sometimes be 1 Touch Transformer in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 dut I 491deu5 Kids Bear Robot Duck filien Computer Female Hale 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Explanation Child Transforms the input into the sound of a child s voice Bear Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal Robot Transforms the input into the
120. als If using the Performance Pads or pedals you must first at the desired place to start re recording Depressing the pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to playback change the function of the pedals and Pads Follow the When you use the Performance Pads or amp Rec procedures in Assigning Functions to Pedals and button recording begins when you press the Pad or Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 button upon reaching a specified point in the song and assign Auto Punch In Out gt to the buttons or pedal When you press the Pad or amp Rec button once more 1 In the Rec Mode screen p 117 select Manual Punch the KF 7 exits recording mode and returns to normal In Out playback This changes the recording mode to Punch In Recording a Passage Specified by Markers Recording l Before you start re recording place markers A and B to Touch Exit to return to the Menu screen define the passage 2 Begin recording Following the procedures described in Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 82 use Markers A Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing and B to specify the passage Recordings p 96 or Multitrack Recording with 16 2 In the Rec Mode screen p 117 select Auto Punch In Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 Out The previously recorded performance will be play
121. am Arranger button If the One Touch Program Arranger button has not been pressed only the rhythm pattern is played p 53 Is the 16 track Sequencer screen displayed p 113 Chord Intelligence can t be used Has Chord Intelligence been switched off p 145 Is the setting for Piano Style Arranger active p 62 Troubleshooting Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy Accompaniment tempo becomes unstable In certain cases such as when playing Music Styles on disks the accompaniment may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Song doesn t play back correctly Song doesn t play back Does the screen indicate message like OK to delete song p 90 The internal songs cannot be played back while recorded performance data remains in the KF 7 s memory Try playing back the song after deleting the performance data Score is not indi cated properly in the display If you select a part that does not contain perfor mance data notes will not be displayed in the score Change the part that is displayed p 72 The score screen feature is particularly unsuit able for the display of difficult complex musi cal works that demand accurate notation Refer to Notes Regarding the Score Display p 71 In the score screen some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen and not be displayed O
122. ance with the Balance knob ee a E d are pressed You can usually leave the knob at the center Balance 7 position z 1e3deu5 Accomp e e Keyboard B Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style and the balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard 1 Press the Part Balance button and watch the indicator light up The following Part Balance screen appears to switch the two screens Part Balance Phrase Switch the screens The volume balance between each of the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated 63 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Display Performance part Rhythm Music Style Rhythm Part Bass Bass Bass Tone p 55 Accomp Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompani ment 3 Chord Tone p 55 Phrase Short phrases sounded when the Performance Pads are pressed p 59 N kn g a I U This shows the performance p 24 or split performance p 25 are used or the volume balance Part Balance Switch the screens volume balance between each of the keyboard s Tones when layer when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects p 22 Displayed Tone Part Drums Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the ke
123. anges automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song 1 Press the Tempo or buttons to adjust a tempo You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of J 20 250 The metronome is automatically set to 108 when the power is turned on Pressing the and buttons simultaneously returns the selected song accompaniment to the basic tempo O Determining the tempo with tempo marks You can set the tempo by choosing a tempo indicator such as Allegro indicated on the score 1 On the Metronome screen touch the tempo indicator bar graph The tempo is set to match the tempo mark O Changing the beat of the metronome 1 a On the Metronome screen touch Beat The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Choose the beat from among the selections by touching your choice You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices for the beat by touching MEMD You can also use the dial to adjust the tempo Turn it clockwise for a faster tempo or counterclockwise for a slower tempo I 491deu5 MEMD 0 When 4 is selected only the upbeat will sound 41 Chapter 1 Performance O Changing the volume The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels 1 a On the Metronome screen touch Volume The available choices for the volume level appear at the bottom of the screen
124. anging the Way User Programs Are Called Up When calling up User Programs you can prevent the settings for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not touching the touch screen for a few moments 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch Option in the lower part of the screen A settings screen like the following appears Z UPG Option sS All settings in the Mr program are changed bu touching the screen brieflu 3 Touch briefly and only non H Arranger settings are changed Ab Touch for several seconds and all settings are changed 3 Touch lt Instant gt or lt Delayed gt to select the setting Display Explanation Immediately after a User Program name is touched the Automatic Accompaniment settings also switch Instant The Automatic Accompaniment settings switch after you touch and road the User Program name for a few moments Delayed Touch lt Exit gt to return to the User Program screen 108 Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs You ca use the Pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User Programs in order 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt Option gt in the lower part of the screen to display screen like the UP6 Option SSS Pedal Shift 4 Touch t to select the setting Display Explanation Off You can use a function assigned to the
125. ant tempo Cancel the tempo mute setting 1 Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons Tempo muting is canceled Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song 79 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In When you re playing along with a song you can listen to the tempo before you start playing by adding a count in This audible count before the song playback is called a Count In 1 Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up MEMb The Metronome screen p 40 appears You can have a count sound be If you are not using the metronome press the Metronome button so its indicator played before the song starts playing back by holding down goes out the Reset button while you 2 Touch Count In press the Play Stop button The status of the Count In The following Count In settings screen appears settings won t be affected by your use of this procedure Z Count In Settings Ese Measure Repeat 3 a Touch Switch to set this to ON With this setting two measures count down before the song playback starts Cancelling the Count In 1 Inthe Metronome screen touch Count In NEM For more about other settings 3 on the Count In settings BH to set this to OFF screen refer to Settings for the Count I
126. any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group You ll see that button s indicator light up The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you ve selected PianoStrings aS EX Piano Choir aS This screen is called the Tone selection screen You can touch Audition for an audio demonstration of a particular tone Touch lt E to switch the screen and display the next selection You can touch Effects to add effect sounds to a variety of tones p 32 You can touch Search to find tones according to the search criteria you specify p 23 2 Selecta tone then touch the tone name You ll hear the tone you ve selected when you play the keyboard You can use the buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select tones 3 a Touch Exit This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen 21 Chapter 1 Performance B Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal sounds Dx g Q lt U 1 Press the Select Various Tones button and watch the indicator light up 2 a Touch Drums or lt SFX gt POP Mf Touch the screen to play sounds MEMO The combination of sounds Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound assigned to the keyboard You can also have play sounds by touching the screen
127. are shown in the score if the selected part the performance contains no data To change the part being displayed refer Notes Regarding the Score Display to Making Detailed Settings e When playback of a song begins X appears in the Score screen While this torthe score Display p 72 symbol is displayed performance data is being loaded from floppy disk or internal memory It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the data Please wait The displayed scores are based on music files Priority is placed on the readability of the displayed music not on the accurate rendition of difficult high level performances Thus there may be discrepancies seen when compared with commercially available printed music The display is not intended for viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed scores or complex songs On the score display screen lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range displayed on the screen and may not be visible Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the score or change e 2 ij the displayed part during playback of the song B Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds e Touch the Notes LA In the Score screen you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen When you touch EJ to show the keyboard on the screen the touched note is indicated by the corresponding note on the keyboard This allows you confirm notes by sight s
128. art Beat Footsteps Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 Honky tonk E Piano 1 E Piano 2 Harpsichord Clav Celesta Glocken Music Box Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Tubularbell Santur Organ 1 Organ 2 Pop Organ 1 Rock Organ2 ChurchOrg 1 Reed Organ AccordionFr Harmonica Bandoneon Nylon strGt Steel strGt Jazz Guitar Clean Gt Muted Gt Funk Gt OverdriveGt Dist Guitar Gt Harmo Acoustic Bs Fingered Bs Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 SynthBass 1 SynthBass 2 Rubber Bass Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Str Pizzicato Harp Timpani Strings SlowStrings Syn Str 1 Syn Str 2 Choir Aahs Pop Voice SynVox Orche Hit Trumpet Trombone Tuba M Trumpet FrenchHorns Brass 1 SynthBrass1 SynthBrass2 A Brass 1 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax BaritoneSax Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave Saw Wave Doctor Solo SynCalliope ChifferLead Charang Solo Vox 5th SawWave Bass amp Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Polysynth Space Voice Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Star Theme Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums
129. ash Cymbal E Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 E Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap Vibra slap ae Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 C4 60 High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo High Bongo E Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo Low Bongo 62 Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga Mute High Conga LE Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga 64 Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo cs Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa p MUN Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 C572 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 EEE Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 EZ caves Claves Claves Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 77 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block EE Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 RE Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle
130. ave GS Room 1 GS Room 2 Reproduces an indoor type reverb Provides a clear expansive reverberation GS Room 3 GS Hall 1 Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall Gives reverberation GS Hall 2 with a greater sense of depth than GS Room Reproduces a plate echo reverberation created using the vibrations GS Plate of a metal plate A delayed sound that is added to the original similar to the reflected GS Delay sounds of mountain echoes GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned shifted laterally 27 T 4e1deu5 Chapter 1 Performance 3 Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected MEMO E i ied when th Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb and to the Nps Nechiseppned when the slider is moved all the way to left for less i the left In this case the You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial E NR button s indicator won t light Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value up when you press the When you touch Exit the reverb effect is activated and you return to the previous Reverb button Screen Cancelling the Effect 4 Press the Reverb button and watch the indicator light go out e g Q lt U The reverb effect is eliminated B Adding Three Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play Advanced 3D You can add three dimensional breadth to th
131. b6 B6 PE Prom erc m rmm rem rmm F m6 Abm6 Bb me rmm Pm tcm mmm remm mom gt ke g 3 2 a 9 un 175 Internal Song List Jazzy Secret Agent 1992 Roland Corporation Late Night Chopin 2002 Roland Corporation Fly Free 1998 Roland Corporation Sun Daze 1992 Roland Corporation Keepers Tale 1992 Roland Corporation CountOnBlues 1992 Roland Corporation OneDown amp Easy 1994 Roland Corporation A PreludeTo 1996 Roland Corporation BachsBoppin 1996 Roland Corporation HungarianRag 1996 Roland Corporation KismetsSalsa 1996 Roland Corporation Matthew 1998 Roland Corporation RollOverLudwig 1996 Roland Corporation Kids Frog Song 1999 Roland Corporation HoneybeeMarch 1999 Roland Corporation Jingle Bell 1999 Roland Corporation Little Fox 1999 Roland Corporation Little Row 2001 Roland Corporation LondonBridge 1999 Roland Corporation Mary Lamb 1999 Roland Corporation OldMacDonald 1999 Roland Corporation The Cuckoo 1999 Roland Corporation Twinkle 1999 Roland Corporation Folks Annie Laurie 1993 Roland Corporation Londonderry Air 1993 Roland Corporation AmazingGrace 1993 Roland Corporation Ave Maria 1993 Roland Corporation Clock 1
132. both enhancer and delay effects Chorus gt Delay Applies both chorus and delay effects Flanger gt Delay Applies both flanger and delay effects 172 Music Style List Pop Rock AmericanPop1 AmericanPop2 Easy Listen Shuffle Pop ShufleFusion Contemporary Funky Pop 70s 1 70s 2 Cool Al Asian Pop Swing Pop Groovin Medium Pop Michael sPop OrchestraPop Light Pop 70s 8 Beat British Pop e0s R amp B Fusion West Coast Rollin Light Fusion Shuffle Rock Power Pop Power Rock Hard Rock Heavy Metal HipHop Techno Ballad Acoustic Scat Ballad Piano Pop Guitar Trio 6 8 Ballad Slow Pop Symph Ballad Piano Night Guitar Pop Swing Ballad Pop Ballad Latin Guitar Soulful Sax 8BeatBallad1 8BeatBallad2 Soft Ballad 12 8 Ballad Chapel Crystal Piano Latin Piano Waltz ClasiclPolka PianoClasic1 PianoClasic2 Guitar Bossa Gtr Fast Pop Guitar Waltz Harp Strings P Pop 1 P Classic 1 P Slow Waltz P Night P Bossa Nova P Pop2 P Stride P Concerto 1 P Classic 2 P Ballad 1 P Ballad 2 P Swing Pop P Waltz P Concerto 2 P Concerto 3 P Swing P Boogie P Slow Swing P 50s Rock P Latin Oldies Country Rock n Roll1 Oldies 1 Rock n Roll2 Country Gtr HonkyTonkin Slow Oldies Slow Dance Twist Oldies 2 CountryBalad OldtimeCntry D Country Rock n Roll3 Surf fun JB Soul Blues 50s R amp B Summer Days PianoRagtime Charleston Bluegrass Country Cou
133. button and layer performance in the right hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the 4 Upper button Drum set or sound effect performance Recorded on the R Rhythm button 92 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording With Accompaniment Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment Settings for recording performances 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment 2 Decide on the Music Style When you have finished choosing the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen Recording Settings 3 a Press the e Rec button You press the Rec button and the following messages will appear when a song has already been recorded Do you want to record a neu song or add on to the current song Touch lt New Song gt This switches the KF 7 to the settings required for recording a new song The KF 7 is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more 4 Decide on the tempo Start recording 5 Play a chord on the left hand part of the keyboard An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts and recording starts at the same time Stop recording 6 Press the Intro Ending button An ending plays then the Automatic Accompaniment and recording stop at the same time Listening to the recorded performance 7 Press the ma Reset button
134. chestrator button and watch the indicator light up MEM The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads When you press the Phrase button or User Function 2 Press Performance Pad 1 4 to change the arrangement for the buttons the Style accomp animent Orchestrator button s f indicator goes out and the Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up fcion othe Tert unction Oo e Ferrormance Pad 1 plays the simplest arrangement and Pad 4 gives you the most elaborate Pads changes For details refer arrangement to p 59 and p 143 Style Orchestrator Explanation Basic This is the simplest arrangement When simple Music Styles are Advanced 1 selected there may be no This is a more involved arrangement Advanced 2 change in the arrangement even when you use the Style Full This is the most elavorate arrangement Orchestrator function NEMb You cannot change the orchestration of the Styles with the Performance Pad when the Style Orchestrator User Function button s indicator is not lit Refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 58 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B Playing Phrases Phrase Performance Pad Basic Advaedi Advanced Full 1 6660 Press the Phrase button and watch the indicator light up Th
135. ckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOL
136. corded material is erased Mix Recording p 117 New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record melodies over prerecorded accompaniment Loop Recording p 118 Specified measures are recorded repeatedly while new notes are combined with existing music A convenient feature for creating rhythm parts Loop Recording allows you to record over and over within a selected segment adding a different percussion sound with each pass Punch in Recording p 119 You can re record only a specified passage as you listen to a recorded performance Immediately after the power is turned on Replace Recording is selected Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Recording Method 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears gt 3 Composer Menu Chord Sequencer Style Composer 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A Rec Mode screen like the following appears 3 Touch lt Rec Mode gt to select the recording mode Display Recording Method Replace Replace Recording Mix Mix Recording Loop Loop Recording Auto Punch Punch in recording of the interval In Out between set markers Punch in recording starting from the point at which the pedal the Manual Performance Pad or the Rec but Punch In Out ton is pressed For more about Punch In Recording refer to p 119
137. creen appears J to switch the screens 2 Touch Lyrics A screen like the one shown below appears MEMO Even when this is set to OFF ZZEE Lyrics you can still have the lyrics be displayed by touching lt lyrics gt when it appears in the Piano or Basic screen p 19 m g Q lt s 3 Touch sit to select the setting NEM The screen may be switched when you press the button Display Explanation while the Lyrics screen is ON Lyrics are displayed automatically when performance data con displayed To have the lyrics taining lyrics is played back displayed again touch lyrics on the Piano or Basic Lyrics are not displayed even if the song data being played back OFF contains lyrics data screen or stop playback of the song then press the N Play Stop button 4 Touch Exit to return to the Menu screen 88 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign 3 Normally when playing back Roland Piano Digital compatible SMFs p 181 the left hand part is assigned to the 3 Lower button and the right hand part is assigned to the 4 Upper button However assignment of the right hand and left hand parts may differ with some SMF data If you cannot get the right
138. ctive Sense Reset Mode 1 Mode 3 OMNI ON POLY OMNI OFF POLY 182 oo e Mode 3 Mode 3 x Mode 3 4 M 1 Fk kk k k k kk kkk k k 15 113 EEEE EEEE EE EEE E Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Portamento control Effect1 depth Effect3 depth NRPN LSB MSB RPN LSB MSB 0 127 AKA 127 number 1 128 Reverb Chorus O O O O O O O O O O O O O O A OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO po x lt 120 126 127 123 125 x OOOOQ OO 1 Ox is selectable by SysEx 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz1 3 Ox is selectable O Yes X No Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO Main Specifications lt Keyboard gt Keyboard 88 keys Progressive hammer action keyboard Touch Sensitivity 100 levels Keyboard Mode Whole Split adjustable split point Layer Arranger Piano Style Arranger Manual Drums SFX Sound Source Conforms to GM2 GS XG Lite Max Polyphony 128 voices Tones Tone Search by terms and by letters 6 groups 683 variations including 16 drum sets 2 SFX sets Temperament 8 types selectable tonic Stretched Tuning 2 types Master Tuning 415 3 Hz 466 2 Hz adjustable in increments of 0 1 Hz Transpose Key Transpose 6 5 in units of semitone Playback Transpose 24 24 in units of
139. d Rec Mode 116 Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording Replace Recording sss 117 Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds Mix Recording sesana ote te ttes 117 Repeated Recording at the Same Location Loop Recording sas sse 118 Re Recording Part of Your Performance Punch in Recording sse 119 Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Sequencer ssssssseseeeeeeeeneene nens 120 Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard 121 Editing Songs sss Basic Operation of the Editing Functions Undoing Edits Undo 122 Copying Measures Copy 122 Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts 123 Correcting Timing Discrepancies Quantize 123 Deleting Measures Delete sss 124 Inserting Blank Measures Insert sss 124 Transposing Individual Parts Transpose 125 Making Measures Blank Erase sss 125 Exchanging Parts Part Exchange ssssss 126 Correcting Notes One by One Note Edit 126 Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song PC Edit 127 Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song Beat Map 127 Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs ss 128 Changing the Tempo Within the Song
140. d segment and simple playback and recording of each hand s part features that only a digital piano can provide Other useful practice features include a Replay pedal that you can press to stop the performance and go back when you have trouble with what you re playing and Touch the Note a function that lets you confirm how a note sounds by touching the note on the screen Features geared specifically for young children include Wonderland where kids can enjoy touching a variety of instruments and the Game an ear training feature which helps build their listening abilities with all the fun of a game Rhythm Partner Provides Natural Sounding Tempo Along with a wide variety of metronome functions that allow you to change the tone and note divisions patterns the KF 7 also includes built in rhythm functions Now you can perform with a natural tempo that matches the rhythm Refined and Simple Design From the tasteful brown tones to real wood used for the sides this instrument has a look to fit in naturally with your room s interior design Introduction How To Use This Manual The KF 7 Owner s Manual consists of two volumes Quick Start and the Owner s Manual Please start out by reading Before You Start Playing p 16 in the Owner s Manual this volume This explains how to connect the KF 7 s power cord and how to turn on the instrument s power After turning on the KF 7 s power please continu
141. d to each part 3 Touch the part to be set The Part you touched appears in reverse video 4 Press an Music Style button then select a Style with the touch screen or the buttons and the dial When you have decided on a Style touch Exit to display the Style Composer screen 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each Part Deciding on a Style 6 Touch Execute You have created a new Style The User Style is recorded to the Music Style User button Try playing with the new Style If you turn off the power or record a new User Style any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 135 O Muting Parts for a particular division You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions For example have all of the parts play in the Variation accompaniment pattern while muting Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 in the Original accompaniment pattern With this arrangement when the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the variation it creates a more elaborate effect in the accompaniment gt For more on Divisions refer to the Style Arrangements p 132 l Touch the screen to choose the Part you want to mute out 2 Press the Fill In To Variation or To Original button to switch to the division that you want to mute 3 Touch
142. dds more interest to the song It can be effective to use the simpler original pattern for the first half of the song and the variation pattern for the second half What s a Fill In z adeyyo A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a Fill In The KF 7 automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style Press the Fill In Variation button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played Press the Fill In Original button and watch the indicator light up The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one bar fill in at the appropriate place and time Adding a fill in without changing the accompaniment pattern You can play only the fill in without changing the accompaniment pattern Press the lit Original or Variation Fill In button during the performance 57 N g Q lt U Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Style Orchestrator You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment This function is called Style Orchestrator Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements MO 0 Performance Pad E Basic Advanced i Advanced Full Style 1 2 3 4 Orchestrator 1 Press the Style Or
143. ding those describing the current status of your data selections or settings Automatic Accompaniment can be saved to the User Program button You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the User Program button Saving your preferred combinations of Music Styles and Tones as well as other frequently used settings makes it more convenient You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KF 7 For more on what can be registered to a User Program refer to Parameters Stored in the User Program p 180 1 Set the Music Style Tone and other data until the settings are the way you want them 2 Press the User Program button A User Program screen like the one shown below appears 1 Doollap Group 4 Modern Jazz 2 StraightRock 5 Sunphonu 3 Rock n Fever 6 South Wind Write 3 Touch Write A Write User Program screen like the following appears rite User Prooram B _ Determining the name of the User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt A Rename screen like the following appears When you touch the cursor moves When you touch the icon for the character to be input the character appears of the cursor potion For example touching the lt ABC gt icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of c
144. disks or in user memory can be called up on an individual set basis to the User Program button Note that calling up these User Programs results in the deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the User Program button When loading a set of User Programs from a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For more on working with the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 99 l Press the User Program button Touch File 3 Touch Load A Load User Program screen like the following appears 1 User Prooram Specifying the set of User Programs to be loaded 4 Touch lt El iso or A usen gt Touch lt Hl if you are loading User Programs from a floppy disk touch lt gt if you are loading User Programs from the user memory 5 Touch the name of User Program to load 6 Touch lt Load gt The confirmation message appears 7 Touch lt OK gt The selected User Programs are loaded to the User Program button Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable 110 Deleting Saved User Program Sets You can delete individual User Program sets saved to floppy disks or in user memory When deleting a set of User Programs on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive For more on
145. ds Ah A ANE 0 Digital Intelligent Piano KF 7 Performance Pad o o Q Song Stylist Volume Brilliance Balance FO Basic Advanced1 Advanced Full To Variation To Original ending Sop s F ya 1 0000 66 a 00 jo 1 2 5 6 13 15 16 17 21 1 Volume knob Performance Pads Adjusts the overall volume p 18 13 11 14 2 Brilliance knob Adjusts the brightness of the sound p 18 3 Wonderland Game button Here you can learn about instruments while having fun See the Quick Start Balance 4 Part Balance button This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the performance parts p 63 5 Balance knob Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the keyboard and for songs and accompaniments p 63 6 User Program button Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons p 107 DSP 7 Reverb button Adds reverberation to the sound p 27 8 Advanced 3D button Adds three dimensional breadth to the accompaniment sounds p 28 9 Equalizer button Allows you to adjust the tone quality with the equalizer p 30 10 Style Orchestrator button This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads p 58 11 Phrase Button This is used to play a short phrase with the Performance Pads p 59 User Function Button This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance Pads p 143 12 10 14 15
146. e Intro pay i keyboard Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment you can add intros and endings by pressing the Intro Ending button and make changes to the rhythm patterns with the Fill In button p 57 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo When the Basic screen is displayed you can use the Tempo buttons or the buttons and the dial to change the tempo The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen J 134 EB AnericanPop Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the accompaniment is playing 53 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment Pressing the One Touch Program Arranger button activates Sync Start for the accompaniment which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on the lower section of the keyboard and automatically sets an appropriate intro for the accompaniment You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and stops 3 00 000000 0 record rayback N g Q lt U B Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync MEM Sync Start is set immediately 1 Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously causing the indicators of both buttons to flash after the One Touch Pr
147. e a song or the keyboard the Transpose button s indicator lights up As you play the keyboard or play back the song the notes are transposed When you touch Exit the transposition remains in effect and you re returned to the previous screen Cancelling Transposition 4 Press the Transpose button and the indicator light goes out MEM The transposition value reverts Transposition is cancelled to 0 when you turn off the power or select another song The next time you press the Transpose button illuminating the indicator the music is transposed by the value set here Example Playing a song in E major while playing the keys for C major In this example C is the root note in the key of C major E the root of E major is the third in C major It is up four keys including the black keys so touch g enter 4 for the setting 86 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Detailed Song Playback Settings B Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back NEM Songs Play Mode For detailed information about With the normal setting GS tones sounds that are compatible with other GS GS refer to About the KF 7 instruments will normally be used to play back song data By changing this setting Sound Generator p 181 you can play back song using KF specific tones for certain portions of the data 1 a Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears gt 5 Composer Menu SSS
148. e by reading Quick Start By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start you can easily learn how to play the KF 7 and make use of its major functions especially procedures that involve use of the main buttons The Owner s Manual describes procedures from basic operation to procedures for special applications for example using the KF 7 as an accompanist and creating songs that will help you master the KF 7 s many performance functions B Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler more concise instructions Button names are enclosed in square brackets as in One Touch Program Piano button On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets gt as in Exit The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching An asterisk or a at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution These should not be ignored p refers to pages within the manual Ke Panel Descriptions Front Panel 3 478 9 101112 14 18 1920 Song Roland DSP Music Style Rhythm Partner Collection KA 000 000 000000 Lolo Oz Game Part Balance Advanced Reverb Equalizer Style Phrase User Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Trad Metronome Rhythm Disk L quick Tour J 3D Orchestrator Function Rock Acoustic County Swing Gospel Ki
149. e gt then use the buttons or the dial to switch the mode to Auto This makes the setting for the Auto mode 5 Touch lt Chord Root gt and lt Chord Type gt then use the buttons or the dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to be extracted 6 Touch lt Division gt then use the buttons or the dial to select the Division Laaqdey gt Display Performance division Intro Intro Original Original accompaniment pattern ae From the fill in to the variation Variation Variation accompaniment pattern Fill To Ori From the fill in to the original Ending Ending Only one measure can be extracted when Fill To Vari or Fill To Ori is selected for the Division The number of measures may also be limited in other Divisions 133 M LT 2 6 o Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles 7 Touch From and For then use the buttons or the dial to select the measures to be extracted Touching Play at the bottom of the screen you can listen to performance of the portion which you chose 8 Repeat Steps 5 7 to create Styles for all of the Divisions fnosetting is made for a Division it uses a simple drum pattern Deciding on a Style 9 When you re done making all the Division settings touch Execute The User Style is recorded to the User button If you turn off the power or record a new User Sty
150. e instrument is set so that phrases play with the Performance Pads A screen like the one shown below appears Phrase Setting SS Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Touch s t to choose the type of phrase Press one of the Pads The selected phrase plays When the phrase continues playing press the Pad once more to stop it With certain phrases the accompaniment stops while the phrase is playing When you touch Exit you re returned to the previous screen while the same function remains assigned to the Pads z adeyyo MEMD When you switch Music Styles the phrases assigned to the Performance Pads are switched If you do not want to have the phrase settings change when you change Music Styles refer to Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 142 59 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adding Harmony to the Right Hand Part Melody Intelligence You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand This function is called Melody Intelligence N g Q lt U 1 Press the Melody Intelligence button and watch the indicator light up When you play something on the right hand section of the keyboard harmony is added The following Melody Intelligence screen appears
151. e played when the notes are touched Do Re Mi When Original is selected a original tone for the song is Tone Original selected 8 When Do Re Mi Voice is selected the notes are sung as Do Re Mi Selects whether the score display or the keyboard display Check Score Keyboard is used in demonstrating the example performance and your own recorded performance in the Check screen Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Adjusting the Tempo This changes the song and Music Style tempos If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed you may find it helpful to first practice with the tempo slowed down Then after becoming more familiar with the song you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes And you can change the tempo even when the song is in progress Adjusting the tempo with the Tempo buttons a T Pressing the button once increases the tempo by one unit Holding down the 3 cf w button makes the tempo increase continuously Pressing the button once decreases the tempo by one unit Holding down the button makes the tempo decrease continuously Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo Adjusting the tempo with the dial When the tempo is displayed at the upper left area of the screen except in the Rhythm screen p
152. e sasae aaa a RR E deett eee a a akan 81 114 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start N New Songs ehe cederet rent eee Wee ee 91 NIC No Chord 2 auae EURO RERO ORI QS 13 Note Edit Song Edit netten el 126 O Octave Shift eno IS RI ag a E ee 26 OneNote 4 testet estet ete na E E Eea angi 75 One Touch Program Arranger button 47 One Touch Program Piano button eee 20 One Touch Settirigs nene e eei 142 One Touch Arranger eese nennen nennen 47 Settihigs coc cose ees Ue ee Eee IURE I E che 141 On Touch Piano shes 5 2 5 3 5 ere ine eire do eet feo enin 20 Settings seerne aa Kana Na eka pak aa ga i tires 138 Opening Message 0s0s0000a0s0n0r0naenenon anae naon ane e nnananeenana 148 Organi KENA NA AA A Ka ET QS 14 Original sesse ian aaa ga aka Na a babag ama aaa gagak re nter 46 Original button ene Bees Nese eee eee 57 Output Jacks 2 1 e e erbe petente daa Pa test ded 157 P Panel Lock sasana etae tee es 152 Part Balance 4 2 eet dianani sanggane aga aga aa ege 63 Part Balance button essere enne 63 Part Exchange Song Edit sse 126 PC Edit Song Edit inei nnotata eet 127 B dalEX e eere UE e e TUE QS 14 Pedal Settings anas sarana aee als 143 PetcussiOh 4i eee e cer entr exer eia eec Eh Hiero ide 22 Performance Pad eene 58 59 143 PLASC p as ing aaa gena dan abaan ga agan cutee 59
153. e set to remain off at all times At step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Beat Indicator A screen like the one shown below appears 5 Beat Indicator Zee Touch 1 to turn the setting ON or OFF so the beat indicator remains off B Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup Normally the various settings revert to their default values when the power is turned off However you can specify that the settings will be remembered even when the power is turned off This function is called Memory Backup For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup refer to Parameters Stored in Memory Backup p 180 At step 3 in Procedure p 147 touch Memory Backup A screen like the one shown below appears gt 5 Menory Backup SRS _ Stores settings in internal memoru Touch lt Execute gt The confirmation message appears on screen Touch lt OK gt to store the setting When the setting has been stored in memory the previous screen will reappear Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable 150 B Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset You can return the content stored with Memory Backup p 150 and the User Programs p 107 to their original factory settings This operation is referred to as Factory Reset
154. e settings for the MIDI send channel and Local Control ON or OFF as needed p 155 Connection Examples Connection with an Apple Macintosh computer Use a computer cable sold separately to connect the Computer connector on the KF 7 to the modem port or printer port on the Apple Macintosh Set the Computer switch to Mac When using the Macintosh Patch Bay utility specify 1 MHz as the Interface Type MIDI Interface Clock Apple Macintosh Modem Port q C_N Computer cable sold separately Connection with an IBM PC Use a computer cable sold separately to connect the Computer connector on the KF 7 to the COM1 or COM2 serial port on the IBM PC Set the Computer switch to PC 2 IBM PC AT RS 232C mk Computer cable sold separately 159 Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices MEMO a kn 2 6 o 160 Troubleshooting If you think there s a problem read this first Case Cause Remedy Case Cause Remedy The power doesn t come on Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly p 16 No sound is heard The button doesn t work Is the panel locked p 152 Turn the power off then back on Nothing appears on screen The KF 7 uses a liquid crystal sc
155. e sounds you play with automatic accompaniment p 46 or to internal songs or music files With this effect called Advanced 3D you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance 1 a Press the Advanced 3D button and watch the indicator light up The following Advanced 3D screen appears Let S Lo S Rhuthm Rhuthm S R e Advanced 3D ESSEE Z Advanced 3D OFF 2 Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part MEMD If all of the parts are switched off the Advanced 3D button s indicator won t light Three dimensional breadth is added to the performance part you ve selected When you touch Exit the Advanced 3D effect is activated and you return to the previous screen up when you press the button Cancelling the Effect 3 Press the Advanced 3D button and watch the indicator goes out The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts 28 Chapter 1 Performance O Selecting the tone to which the effect is applied With Keyboard in Advanced 3D set to On you can select the parts to which the 3D effect is to be applied when the keyboard is played 1 Press the Advanced 3D button and watch the indicator light up 2 On the Advanced 3D screen touch Option A screen like the one shown below appears gt Advanced 3D Option SSE The
156. e you touch lt gt the pitch is lowered one octave The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound 2 to two octaves above the original 2 Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen ME When the keyboard has been divided into upper and lower sections the damper pedal is applied to only the upper section If you want to add lingering reverberations to the notes of the lower section see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 ME You cannot use Octave Shift when using a single tone for the entire keyboard or in the right hand Tone during layer performances Chapter 1 Performance Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KF 7 Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall Press the Reverb button and watch the its indicator light up A Reverb screen like the one shown below appears Gymnasium Reverb zz 2 Touch an icon to select the performance space Display Explanation Ground Wide open space with no reverberations Room Small room Lounge Larger room Studio A recording studio Gymnasium In a gymnasium Hall Large concert hall reverberation Dome A domed ballpark Cave Adds the extended reverberations found inside a c
157. ecify the measure then change the beat 127 kn 2 6 U Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs You can change the basic tempo of a composition The basic tempo was initially set when the song was recorded 1 Press the Tempo and buttons to choose a tempo 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the I Reset button The song s basic tempo changes The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn off the power or choose a different song Save important song data to floppy disks or to user memory p 101 If the song you re working on has tempo changes press the ka Reset button to go back to the beginning of the song before you carry out this operation Changing the Tempo Within the Song You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition The KF 7 stores song tempo information and performance data separately Therefore when making changes to the tempo in a song you must record the changes in the tempo information independently of the performance data This recording of the tempo is called Tempo Recording B Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo changes Setting the Rec Mode to Tempo 1 Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt Rec Mode gt A screen like the one shown below appears SS 5 Rec Mode SSS Rec
158. ects GS Chorus 4 Applies a deep chorus effect with guick Distortion Applies both distortion and chorus undulations Chorus effects GS Feedback A soft sound with a flanger effect Distortion Applies both distortion and flanger Chorus gt Flanger effects An effect that sounds like a jet plane s i i i GS Flanger u 1 jet p Distortion gt Delay Applies both distortion and delay ascent descent GS Short Delay A short echo effect effects GS Short Delay Feedback A short echo with many repetitions Sympathetic Resonance Applies a resonance effect when the damper pedal is depressed Stereo Chorus A stereo chorus Wave Chorus Produces a chorus with strong undula tions Hexa Chorus A multilayer chorus Tremolo Chorus A chorus with a tremolo effect 2 Band Chorus Applies different chorus effects in the treble and bass bands Space D A clear chorus Rotary Adds a rotary speaker effect Space Chorus A chorus with extremely small undula tions Stereo Delay Delays the sound with a stereo effect Chorus gt Flanger Applies both chorus and flanger effects Modulation Delay Adds a wavering effect to the delayed sound Triple Tap Delay A three way delay Quadruple Tap Delay A four way delay Phaser Adds undulations to the sound Stereo Flanger Adds metallic reverberations Step Flanger
159. ed back Emme SSS ee aS Recording begins when you press the pedal the Performance Pad or the Rec button start re recording at this time Recording stops when you press the pedal the Performance Pad or the Rec button again and the previously recorded performance is played back 3 When you press the m Play Stop button the erformance stops This changes the recording mode to Punch In P P Recording Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen ordinary Replace Recording mode Take a look at Changing the Recording Method p 117 When you re finished with Punch In Recording return to the 119 kn 2 6 o Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords Chord Sequencer You can enter a chord progression and choose the places where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an accompaniment for a song This feature is called Chord Sequencer Thanks to the chord sequencer you can create an accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your right hand l Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 Touch Chord Sequencer gt The screen like the one s
160. efer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs p 128 and Changing the Tempo Within the Song p 128 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Erasing Recorded Performances You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance 1 Hold down the Select Listen to a Song button and press the 6 Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete Sono fire uou sure 2 a Touch OK This deletes the recorded song When you touch Cancel the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not erased B Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks You can select and erase performances on specific tracks 1 Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance you want to erase then press the Rec button The Track button s light goes dark and the recorded music is erased Changing How Recording Stops When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance you can change the accompaniment and the way recording mode stops 1 Press the Menu button and watch the indicator light up The Menu screen appears 2 a Touch Rec Mode A screen like the one shown below appears 5 gt Bec Mode SSS ec Mode Rec Stop 97 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance 3 a Touch Rec Stop BH to switch between Arranger Stop and Composer Stop Display Explanation
161. effect is applied to all parts played on the keyboard I 491deu5 The effect is applied to layered part 3 Touch lt All Parts or Layer Part Display Explanation All Parts The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard the left hand tone right hand tone and layer tone The effect is applied only to the layer part Layer Part When not using a layer performance p 24 the Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard performance even if lt Keyboard gt on the Advance 3D screen is set to On When you touch lt Exit gt you return to the Advanced 3D screen 29 Chapter 1 Performance B Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalizer The KF 7 features a built in five band digital equalizer An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches frequency ranges to adjust the sound balance for the overall performance For example you can boost the highs to get a crisper sound or boost the low end for a more powerful sound You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the performance space If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound you can correct the distortion with the Master Level slider e g Q lt U 1 Press the Equalizer button The Equalizer screen appears MEMD When lt Flat gt is selected when all sliders are at 0 then
162. ens eicit eee re tee eta Pete daa he tons 19 Piano Screen eere temet reis 19 Basic Screen eee eec e deter 19 Using the Main Icons cccccesecesseseesesseseesssesessessesseeseesesneseass 19 Chapter 1 Performance esee 20 Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects 22 Using Keywords to Search for Tones Tone Search 23 Performing with Two Sounds Layered Together Layer 24 Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split 25 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift 26 Adding Reverberation to the Sound Reverb 27 Adding Three Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play Advanced 3D essere 28 Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality Equalizer a ang A a a uei DE aa sa 30 Adding Effects to Each Tone and Voice sss 32 Applying Effects to the Sound Effects 32 Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect 33 Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files 39 Using the Metronome and Rhythm Rhythm Partner 40 Using the Metronome cccccsescesseseesesseseesestesesesneseeseseesesteseans 40 Changing the Metronome Settings sss 41 Playing R
163. ent Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Piano Style Arranger Usually with Automatic Accompaniment you play chords on the left hand side of the keyboard and the melody on the right hand side Chords can also be recognized over the entire keyboard allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment without splitting the keyboard This function is called Piano Style Arranger This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song by playing chords in the ordinary way without giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button 2 Touch Split to turn the Split function off N g Qa lt U J 134 G 3 Select a Music Style p 50 4 Play the keyboard The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard 62 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style E Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob When this knob is turned You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the completely to the Accompaniment side no notes you play on the keyboard P sounds from the keyboard are A dible hen the k 1 Adjust the volume bal
164. ent sounds p 47 your own performance on the left hand side of the keyboard is re corded here 4 Upper Your own performance on the right hand side of the keyboard is recorded here 94 MEM Music Styles are composed of five parts For details refer to Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment p 46 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording Along with a Song Try recording along with internal songs and songs on disks Here record your right hand performance along with the song accompaniment Settings for recording performances Select a song before you begin recording When you have selected the song press the Score Display button to display the score For more on how to select songs refer to p 65 for instructions on displaying the score refer to p 70 1 Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance NEM After choosing the settings touch lt Exit gt to display the Basic screen The song tempo is stored Recording settings within the song you selected 2 a Press the e Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do you want to record a neu song or add on to the current sono 3 a Touch Add On e 2 5 n With this setting you can record while listening to the selected song Selecting the track to record 4 Press the track button for the track that you want to record i e the track that you want to
165. er on all devices before making any connections Playing Sounds from the KF 7 Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your Performances on a Recording Device Input R L Line In Aux In KF 7 O o O M 9 oe Pedal Line In Line Out 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KF 7 and on the device you re about to connect 157 a kn 2 I o Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices 2 Turn off the power to the KF 7 and other connected equipment 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection 4 Switch on the KF 7 5 Switch on the connected device 6 Adjust the volume level on the KF 7 and the connected device Recording KF 7 Performances on a Recording Device 7 Start recording with the connected device 8 Play the keyboard 9 When the performance ends stop recording on the connected equipment Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the Speakers on the KF 7 ele Output R L Line Out e o O E e Is e 1 Stereo Stereo Pedal Line In Line Out 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KF 7 and on the device you re about to connect 2 Turn off the power to the KF 7 and other connected equipment 3 Use audio cables sold separately to make the connection 4 Turn on the connected equipment 5 Turn on the KF 7 6 Adjust the volume level on the KF 7 and the connec
166. er 67 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 73 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 78 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 81 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 90 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 93 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 98 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 103 1996 Roland Corporation Czerny100 1 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 10 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 20 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 30 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 38 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 43 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 60 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 75 O 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 86 1995 Roland Corporation Czerny100 96 1995 Roland Corporation Openness 1999 Roland Corporation Arabesque 1999 Roland Corporation Pastoral 1999 Roland Corporation SmallGathering 1999 Roland Corporation Innocence 1999 Roland Corporation Progress O 1999 Roland Corporation Clear Stream 1999 Roland Corporation Gracefulness 1999 Roland Corporation 177 gt x ke 3 2 a 9 un 3 2 2 lt 4 Internal Song List Masterpieces Song files of this genre corresponds to the included collection of printed music entitled Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Masterpieces Standchen 1996 Roland Corp
167. ere enne 33 Vocal Keyboard seien ab miii 37 Vocal Tap Tempo xin pete tete 79 Volume Metronome essiri eere ree eee aee ee nee aa en aaa 42 Overall 6a rhet ve e eadein 18 Rhythm saen ana ga a aa a an nes ag an A an aa 45 Volume knob eese aana akak 18 W Wonderland te actore de Ee E QS 5 X XG Tite idi ee esee i ee tedio bake havens aka taingan 181 189 Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 1 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 7 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Serv
168. ern sounds You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals 1 a On the Metronome screen touch Pattern The available choices for the metronome pattern appear at the bottom of the screen 2 Choosea pattern by touching your choice You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other pattern choices by touching Displayed Description Displayed Description Harmal Usual sound j Dotted half note intervals J Half note intervals J Dotted quarternote s intervals J Quarter note intervals J Potted eighth note intervals D Eighth note intervals J Sixteenth note intervals Doubl Single back beat added tTrirl Triplet rhythm added tahu Shuffle rhythm added 43 Chapter 1 Performance B Playing Rhythm NEM The KF 7 features numerous internal rhythm patterns which like the metronome You cannot have the can be played and stopped with the press of a single button metronome or automatic Playing rhythm patterns instead of the metronome lets you enjoy performances that accompaniment play f simultaneously with the feel like live sessions y Rhythm When you start 1 a Press the Rhythm button and watch the indicator light up Playing the metronome or automatic accompaniment The Rhythm will sound while a Rhythm is playing the The following Rhythm screen appears Rhythm stops e g Q lt s J 108 New Song 8 Beat 16 Beat 8
169. es Creating Original Styles User Styles Although the KF 7 features a variety of internal Music Styles you can also create your own These original Styles are called User Styles You can use either of the two methods described below to create a User Style Style Composer With this method you combine internal Music Styles to create new Styles You can create a new Style by selecting from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 parts in different styles Style Converter p 132 Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from songs composed with the 16 track sequencer When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify just some of the chords and the KF 7 automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the Style Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords 130 B Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles Style Composer You can create a new style by selecting from among the Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 parts in different Styles This function is called the Style Composer You can only combine the KF 7 s built in Styles Displaying the Style Composer Screen l Press the Menu
170. es Roland s original music file is made specifically for practicing the piano Some follow an instructional curriculum allowing for a complete range of lessons such as practicing each hand separately or listening to only the accompaniment SMF Music Files 720KB 1 44MB format SMFs Standard MIDI Files use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device An enormous variety of music is available whether it be for listening for practicing musical instruments for Karaoke etc If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files please consult the retailer where you purchased your KF 7 SMF with Lyrics SME SMF with Lyrics refers to SMF Standard MIDI File that contains the lyrics When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device one bearing the same logo the lyrics will appear in its display B About the KF 7 Sound Generator The KF 7 come equipped with GM 2 GS sound generators D ENERAI L General MIDI The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo Music files bearing the General MIDI logo ca
171. everberation added Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible when supplemented by heavy reverb you may be able to diminish the problem by reduc ing the amount of reverb applied to the sound When listening through speakers Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KF 7 would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center The Tone has changed During automatic accompaniment changing the Music Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the upper part of the key board to match the new Music Style If you want to change only the Music Style without also altering the tempo and Tone check out Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 142 When a performance made along with a Mu sic Files tune has been recorded recording the performance to button 1 Whole may make the Tones for buttons 3 Lower and 4 Up per change as well Reverberation still audible even with Reverb turned off Since the KF 7 s piano sounds faithfully repro duce the sense of spaciousness and reverbera tion of an actual acoustic piano s sound a certain amount of reverberation is still percep tible even with the reverb effect deactivated The bass range sounds odd or there is a vibrating resonance When listening through speakers Playing at loud volumes may cause instru ments near the KF 7 to resonate Resonation ca
172. ey arrive Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI Roland s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos XG lite Xalite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator However keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files due to the reduced set gt ke g 3 2 a 9 u of control parameters and effects 181 DIGITAL PIANO Model KF 7 Date Oct 1 2002 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Function Default Changed Basic Channel Default Messages Altered Note l Number True Voice Note ON Velocity Note OFF After Touch Key s Ch s Pitch Bend 100 101 Prog Change True System Exclusive Song Pos Song Sel Tune System Common Clock Commands All sound off System Real Time Reset all controllers Aux Message Local Control All Notes OFF A
173. from the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will be replaced by the newly re recorded performance Use the lt q Bwd and pp Fwd buttons to go to the measure where you want to begin recording Press the Rec button A screen like the one shown below appears Do uou vant to record a neu sono or add on to the current sono Touch Add on Press the Track button for the track you want to re record The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking The m Play Stop button s indicator flashes and the KF 7 is put in recording standby To cancel recording press the Rec button once more Press the m Play Stop button to begin recording Rerecording the accompaniment part of automatic accompaniment When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance set Sync Start p 54 then specify a chord or press the Start Stop button Press the m Play Stop button to stop recording If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment press the Intro Ending button MEMp Recorded performances are recorded to lt 0 Song Name gt vb When you want to record over again after deleting all of the previous recording refer to Erasing Recorded Performances p 97 vb The song tempo is stored within the song you selected If you want to change the tempo of the recorded song r
174. fter touching Intro Ending Type 2 on the Basic screen a short intro plays Chord Tones and Bass Tones When you play the keys in the left hand side of the keyboard while the Start Stop button s indicator is not lit chords play This note is called the Chord Tone and the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the Bass Tone B Stopping Automatic Accompaniment O Stopping with an added ending 1 Press the Intro Ending button An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops When you press the Intro Ending button after touching Intro Ending Type 2 on the Basic screen a short ending plays O Stopping at the same time the button is pressed 1 Press the Start Stop button The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button z adeyyo MEMD You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone Take a look at Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config p 145 55 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdow n If an intro plays before your performance you can have a count in sound played to the end of the intro helping you hear when to start playing When the Intro has finished playing the accompaniment plays Count Sound 1 Press the Metronome button and watch the indicator light up The Metronome screen p 40 appears N g Q lt
175. g Lead Dual Sqr amp Saw P5 Saw Lead Rhythmic Saw Waspy Synth JP8 Pulse Cheese Saw SynVox Clear Bells Soft Crystal Digi Bells Nylon Harp Nylon Rhodes Fantasia 2 Soft Pad P5 Poly Reso Saw RAVE Vox Fat amp Perky Heaven JP8 Sqr Pad Sweep Pad 2 Big Panner Ai yai a Echo Pan 2 Falling Down Poly King Octave Stack Warm Pad Rising Osc RandomEnding Piano 1 Piano 1w Piano 1d Piano 2 Piano 2w Piano 3 Piano 3w GS Honkytonk Honky tonk 2 GS E Piano1 GS E Piano2 60 s E Piano E Piano 1v E Piano 2v Detuned EP 1 Detuned EP 2 GS Harpsi Coupled Hps Harpsi w Harpsi o Soft Clav Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Viberaphone gt x ke 3 2 a 9 un 165 Q o 2 2 lt Tone List Vibe w GS Marimba Marimba Xylophone Tubular bell Church Bell Carillon Santur Organ 1 Organ 2 Pop Organ Detuned Or 1 Detuned Or 2 Church Org 1 Church Org 2 Church Org 3 Full Organ 4 Jazz Organ Rock Organ 2 Reed Organ Accordion Fr Accordion It GS Harmonica Bandoneon GS Nylon Gt Nylon Guitar Nylon Gt o Ukulele Steel str Gt 12 str Gt Mandolin Jazz Guitar Hawaiian Clean Gt Chorus Gt Muted Gt Funk Gt Funk Gt 2 Overdrive Gt DistortionGt Feedback Gt Gt Harmonics Gt Feedback GS Ac Bass GS Fing Bass Picked Bs Fretless Bs Slap Bass Slap Bass 2 SynthBass101 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Synth Bass 3 Synth Bass 4 Rubber Bass Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contr
176. g a unit in the Roland MT series you don t need to switch off Local Control MT units transmit Local Off messages when their power is switched on If you first switch on the KF 7 then the MT series device Local Control is automatically switched off on the KF 7 m Sending Tone Change Messages Program Change Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB A Program Change is a message that means change to the Tone of the specified number The device that receives this changes to the Tone of the corresponding number When you choose a Program Change message Program Number the Program Number will be transmitted to the MIDI device connected to the KF 7 The MIDI device that receives the Program Number changes the tone to the corresponding Program Number Normally the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available Some MIDI devices however have more than 128 Tones With such devices the Tone is selected through a combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select messages There are two parts of a Bank Select message the MSB Controller 0 with a value of 0 127 and the LSB Controller 32 with a value of 0 127 Some MIDI instruments can t handle Bank Select messages Others can handle Bank Selects but do not recognize the LSB part Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices B Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device Composer MIDI Out When Composer Out is active you can send performance data recorded with the KF 7
177. g system When playing in a temperament other than equal temperament you must specify the tonic the note corresponding to C for a major key or to A for a minor key of the key in which you will play E to select the tonic If you have selected equal temperament it is not necessary to Touch lt Key gt select the tonic O Setting the Tuning Curve Stretch Tuning Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches This method of tuning is unique to the piano and is known as stretched tuning A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning curve Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play Touch the Stretch Tuning lt ON gt or lt OFF gt icon to select the tuning curve When set to ON the tuning curve features extended low and high ranges Stretch Tuning It is suitable for piano solos This setting is selected when the power is turned on When set to OFF the standard tuning curve is used It is suitable when playing in an ensemble with other instruments e gt t 3 ij n co 139 o L1 2 6 o Chapter 8 Various Settings B Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According to the Force Used to Play the Keys Hammer Response You can adjust the timing wit
178. gain If you attempt to play back performance data that contains more data than the entire capac ity of the KF 7 s memory you may find that operations other than playback such as re wind or fast forward become unavailable There is a slight delay before play back of a song on floppy disk starts There are two types of SMF music files for mat 0 and format 1 If the song uses SMF for mat 1 data there will be a slight delay until playback starts Refer to the booklet that came with the music files you re using to determine the format type Tempo of recorded song or metro nome is off If you select an internal song in which the tempo changes during the song and then record the tempo will change in the same way for the performances that are recorded on the other tracks The tempo of the metro nome will also change in the same way If you record additional material without erasing the previously recorded song the song will be recorded at the first recorded tempo Please erase the previously recorded song before you re record p 97 Lyrics are not indi cated properly in the display With some music files the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in the display the lyrics will disap pear To recall them touch lyrics in the Pi ano or Basic screen or press the 5 W Play Stop button The recorded per formance
179. ght hand Tone Octave Shift Jone ayer Effect Type Depth On Off ec e Depth On Tone YP P Left hand Tone Bass Tone Chord Tone Part Balance Keyboard Parts Melody On Off Type Intelligent Split On Off Layer On Off Lower On Off Keyboard Transpose Split Point Keyboard Mode Functions assigning to the soft pedal and Pedal Settings sostenuto pedal One Touch Piano Settings Lid Tuning Tuning Key Stretch Tunings Resonance Type Depth Key Touch String Resonance On Off Depth Hamper Response On Off Depth Metronome Sound System Parameters Count In Measures Sound Countdown Sound Language Opening Message Touch Screen Track Assign Reverb On Off Type Depth Performance User Function Phrase Pad Settings Keyboard settings One Touch Piano One Touch Arranger Others Reverb On Off Type Depth On Off Echo Type Depth Vocal Effects Transformer Type Harmonist Type Transformer Harmonist Music Files Part Bend Range MIDI Settings for User Program PC Number Bank Select LSB Bank Select MSB Program Change Equalizer On Off Each Sliders level Master Level Parameters that switch after the User Program name is touched for a few moments when Option on the User Program screen is set to Delayed Music Style Tempo Part Balance Accompaniment Part
180. go is tones and tones with the a logo Although turning off the power returns effects changed then the effects for 0 MEA i GS ty to their initial settings carrying out Memory Backup p 150 allows you to save and Hie other tones with te GS F store the settings even after the power is turned off or ail logo are also changed 8 automatically E Adding Effects to Mic Vocals Vocal Effect MEM For detail ti With a microphone connected you can add effects to the microphone vocals GAN ee ER microphone refer to Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as Vocal Effect Connecting a Microphone p 18 O How to select Vocal Effect 1 Press the Vocal Effect button The Vocal Effects screen appears Transformer Harmonist 2 Touch any one of the icons Icon Description Page Echo Adjusts the microphone echo p 34 Transformer Alters the microphone vocals p 35 Harmonist Adds harmonies to the original voice p 36 33 Chapter 1 Performance Icon Description Page Vocal Count In Allows you to start songs and Automatic Accom p 37 paniment using your own tempo Vocal Keyboard Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the p 37 vocal scale Music Files You can play a specific part as harmony while p 38 playing back a song previous screen e g Qa lt U Cancelling the Voc
181. h character is to be used for the search Enter the character you re searching for For example touching ABC in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B C Touching A 0 selects the type of character Each time you touch lt A 0 gt the character switches between alphabets and numerals The selected character appears in the middle of the screen 5 a Touch Search The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the Tone Touch Exit several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen 23 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with Two Sounds Layered Together Layer Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a layer performance For instance it s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously Grand Piano 1 e g Q lt U 1 Touch Layer at the bottom of the Basic screen J 108 New Song MEMp When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt lyrics gt appears in the Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance plus the tone indicated in the lower part of the display are now played together MEMD Here the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the right hand When you touch Octave tone and t
182. h which sounds are produced according to the force used to play the keys This function is called Hammer Resonance When a key is pressed on an acoustic piano it causes a hammer to move and strike the strings producing sound The hammers move more slowly when the keys are played gently meaning that sounds are produced just slightly later than when you play the keyboard with greater force When the Hammer Response function is on the interval between the time a key is pressed and the time sound is produced varies according to the force used to play the key The more gently the key is pressed the more delayed the timing of the sound At Step 3 in Procedure p 138 touch Hammer Response Hammer Response SS Playing nore softly slows the Kp hammer movement resulting in la natural acoustic piano sound Touch ON to turn the Hammer Response function on Touch the screen slider to adjust the time it takes for a key to sound after it is pressed The more the slider is moved to Slow the more delayed the sound is when the keys are played softly Conversely sounds are produced more quickly when the keys are played with greater force Touch lt OFF gt to cancel the effect 140 B Adjusting the Resonant Sounds String Resonance When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano the strings for keys that are already pressed also vibrate sympathetically The function used to reproduce this
183. haracters through English upper case English lower case Hou numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch Del the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch Ins a space is inserted at the cursor position e 2 E ij ui 5 When you have finished with the name touch lt Exit gt You re returned to the Write User Program screen Determining the write destination 6 Touch n RZ number o select the write destination 7 Touch lt Write gt The confirmation message appears 8 Touch lt OK gt The current performance settings are saved to the User Program button Never turn off the power while the display indicates lt Executing gt Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable gt You can restore the content registered to the User Program button to the original factory settings Refer to Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset p 150 107 Chapter 5 User Program Registration Calling Up Saved User Programs You can easily call up settings saved to the User Program button 1 Press the User Program button The User Program screen appears 2 Touch the name of the User Program you want to call up When you touch the name of the User Program the buttons or other performance settings instantly change to the previously saved settings B Ch
184. he KF 7 cannot deal with compressed A screen like the one shown below appears image data 1 8 characters in length lowercase is ok A filename extension of BMP uppercase characters must be added after the name gt R User mage Display SS The following characters can be used to name an image ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU VWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs tuvwxyz0123456789 amp A_ Tf you use a character that cannot be used KF Display Name Selecting the images to be displayed in a name it will be replaced by another character when displayed First take a floppy disk to which the image data stored in the KF 7 has been saved and insert the disk in the disk drive 1 Touch lt File gt A screen like the one shown below appears 1 KFBMPOOO 2 KFBHPOO1 5 KFBHPOO4 3 KFBMPOO2 2 Touch the name of the stored image data When you touch Preview you can then show the selected image data on the display selected in Step 1 3 Touch Save The selected image data is stored 4 Touch Exit to return to the previous screen e gt gv D g To clear the stored image data touch lt Erase gt 149 o L1 2 6 o Chapter 8 Various Settings B Turning Off the Beat Indicator Beat Indicator The beat indicator normally flashes in time with the metronome Music Style or song tempo However if you wish it can b
185. he Tempo Before You Begin Playing Count In 80 Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track ButtOns saenake an Aa aa ana aka a ga nga na ah a agan iinan 81 Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker 82 Placing a Marker within a Song sss 82 Playback from a Marker location Erasing a Marker 83 Moving a Marker sssssssssesseeenenene eene 83 Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over 84 Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back Tr tispose eio e eo aa 85 Detailed Song Playback Settings 87 Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs Play Mode 287 Hiding the Lyrics Lyrics Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback Track Assign sss 89 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance 90 Recording a New Song New Song sss 91 Recording With Accompaniment ssssssssseeeenee 93 Recording Along with a Song sss 95 Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings 96 Erasing Recorded Performances sss 97 Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks 97 Changing How Recording Stops sssssssssss 97 Recording Songs Starting with Pickups Using Floppy Disks 99 Inserting and Ejecti
186. he lower part of keyboard For instructions on selecting Music Styles refer to Atone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set The accompaniment begins starting from the intro Selecting Music Styles Music Play chords with the left hand and the melody with the right Style Buttons p 50 MEMp For instructions on starting When you change chords in the left hand the accompaniment also changes Split Point F 3 and stopping the accompaniment refer to Starting and Stopping the The range specifyed a chord Accompaniment p 54 3 Press the Intro Ending button MEMD You can change the range in After the ending plays the accompaniment stops whieh derde are played Please refer to Changing the Keyboard s Split Point Split Point p 142 47 N g Q lt U Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B About Chords A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord the root and the chord type which is determined by the other notes of the chord For example the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note C and the chord type m minor C m is made up of the three notes C E b and G C m is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen Cn l Chord Type Root Note C
187. he tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the layer lt gt lt gt on the tone selection tone screen the pitch of the keyboard s sound is changed Cha nging the tones in octave units To learn more see Shifting the Keyboard 2 Touch the name of the tone to be changed Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift p 26 The tone name will be highlighted in white it p 26 3 Press a Tone button to select the new tone p 21 MEMD 4 When you have selected the tone touch lt Exit gt You can vary the volume level balance of the two tones For The display returns to the Basic screen ee NON instructions see Adjusting Cancelling the Layer the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part 5 Touch Layer Balance p 63 The Layer icon reverts to black and the layer performance is cancelled Now when you play the keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded 24 Chapter 1 Performance Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands Split Dividing the keyboard into right hand and left hand areas then playing different sounds in each section is called split performance The boundary key is called the split point The split point key is included in the left hand keyboard area Each time power to the keyboard is turned on the split point is reset to F 3 MEMD Split Point You can change the split point e gt
188. he user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The 6 symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING 7 7 Use only the attached power supply cord Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards 9 This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft Do not allow any objects e g flammable material S drinks etc to penetrate the unit N Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and re
189. hen the Src is switched to something other than bua e of x pres n u 7 Resolu alf note quarter note Ryan Pattern the KF 7 is set to carry out normal ian 1 6 quarter note triplet 1 8 eighth note copying 1 12 eighth note triplet 1 16 sixteenth Press the m Play Stop button to play back and ied s er triplet confirm the rhythm pattern The rhythm pattern stops when thirty second note you press the m Play Stop button once more When finished with the Quantize settings return to the Song Edit screen 123 x 2 I o Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Deleting Measures Delete You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure When a portion of a performance is deleted the rest of the performance is shifted up to fill the gap Erasing measures in a specified passage is called deleting Ex To delete measures bars 5 8 AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Delete A screen like the one shown below appears Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the om segment to be deleted For Number of measures to be deleted Track button or part number to be deleted Tr Pt When All is selected the same portion of all parts is deleted 124 B Inserting Blank Measures Insert You can add a blank measure at a location you specify This addition of a blank
190. hown below is called Chord Sequencer screen This is the cursor The cursor This is the end of the song When shows where the chord change continuing to add input insert or other information is input measures by touching Ins Chords t Division Original S Drch Full Choras ffau a Exit This indicates the position where the accompaniment pattern Division or the Style Orchestrator changes Display Description One measure is inserted before the measure Ins A where the cursor is positioned The measure in which the cursor is posi Del tioned is deleted Allows input of chords without playing the Chords keyboard Refer to Inputting Chords with out Playing the Keyboard p 121 All Clear Deletes all of the data that s been input Clear Deletes the data at the cursor position Records the input chord progression Execute Touch this icon when you have finished in putting all of the chords 3 Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select a Music Style p 50 120 4 Touch lt Exit gt You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen 5 Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment pattern Refer to Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer 6 When you have finished inputting all the data to
191. htness when the drive is busy reading or writing data Ordinarily the indicator will be less brightly lit or be extinguished Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive Handling Floppy Disks Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recom mended temperature range 10 to 50 C 50 to 122 F Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT positio
192. hythrh ee e ees 44 Changing the Rhythm settings ssssssssssenee 44 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment 46 Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment 46 Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Arranger 0aoeneen eee en anana e anana ea nean nana nean nnann 47 About Chords Pri eH OU e a da a d Rae 48 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering Chord Intelligence sse 48 Viewing Chord Fingerings Chord Finder 49 Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons 50 Selecting Music Styles on Disks 51 Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search esito ertet 52 Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns 53 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo sese 53 Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment 54 Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard Sync sssssssssssss 54 Stopping Automatic Accompaniment sssssss 55 Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro GountdoWwn 5 needed tees 56 Modifying an Accompaniment sssssssseeeeneee 57 Changing the Accompaniment Pattern Fill Ini Buttons sasanga iet tret des 57 Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles Style Orchestrator eee aaa ga Playing Phrases Phrase Adding Har
193. ial Display Description Volume Changes the volume level Reverb Changes the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound Chorus Changes the amount of chorus applied Shifts the direction from which the sound is heard between left and right Panpot Touch to shift the sound to the right or touch M to shift it to the left Display Function Solo Only the selected Part is played back Toggles playback of the selected Part to on Mute or off The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted When you touch lt Clear gt a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears To erase the recorded sound touch lt OK gt If you don t want to erase the recorded sound touch lt Cancel gt Once a performance has been erased it can t be restored 3 Touch lt Options gt to make more detailed settings for the selected part A screen like the one shown below appears You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed When selecting Part 10 or 11 you can touch Drum Set to select the drum set or effect sound The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of the screen 114 What s Panpot Panpot is the control that determines the placement of the sound in the stereo sound field between left and right speakers By altering the Panpot setting you can change the perceived locat
194. ice Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama Jl Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN ROC TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Au
195. ide Stick Jazz Snare Swing Vox Hehho 38 Pop Sanre s Rock Sanre s Jazz Sanre Vox Doyear E Pop Snare Ghost Rock Snare Ghost Pop Snare Swing Vox Thu 40 Pop Snare s Rock Snare s Jazz Sanre Vox That 41 Pop Low Tom f Rock Low Tom f Jazz Low Tom f Vox Aahhh CEJ Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Rock CHH 1 EXC1 Pop CHH 1 EXC1 Vox Tu 43 Pop Low Tom Rock Low Tom Jazz Low Tom Vox Dooh E Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Rock CHH 2 EXC1 Pop CHH 2 EXC1 Vox Ptu 45 Pop Mid Tom f Rock Mid Tom f Jazz Mid Tom f Vox Down _ Pop OHH EXC1 Rock OHH EXC1 Pop OHH EXC1 Vox Pa Pop Mid Tom Rock Mid Tom Jazz Mid Tom Vox Bom 348 Pop High Tom f Rock High Tom f Jazz High Tom f Vox Toear EE Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Rock Crash Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Vox Aahhu 50 Pop High Tom Rock High Tom Jazz High Tom Vox Toya EE Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Vox Thu 52 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Chinees Cymbal Jazz Chinees Cymbal Vox Cheey 53 Pop Ride Bell Pop Ride Bell Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Cymm LEM Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Vox Tub 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Vox Pruru EEJ Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Cha Cha Cowbell Vox Tut 57 Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Chinees Cymbal Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Vox Tyun ME Vibra slap 2 Vibra slap 2 Vibra slap 2 Vox Tdum Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Pop Ride Cymbal 3 Pop Ride Cymbal 2 Vox Afahhhh 4 60 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 High Bongo 2 EE Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 62 Mute Conga Mute Conga Mute Conga M
196. igh Conga Mute High Conga NK 808 Mid Conga 808 Mid Conga Open High Conga Open High Conga 64 808 Low Conga 808 Low Conga Low Conga Low Conga 65 High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale High Timbale E Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo es Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa MUN 808 Maracas 808 Maracas Maracas Maracas Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 72 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 73 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 me 7 808 Claves 808 Claves Claves Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 7 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block EM Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 J ao Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 81 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 os Me Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell gt C684 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree x E Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 3 86 Mute Surdo
197. ion of the sound between the left and right speakers When you press the W Play Stop button you hear what the song sounds like as you change the settings When you press the W Play Stop button playback of the song stops 5 Touch KS to make settings for other parts The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen Change the settings for other parts as needed 6 Hold down the Rec button and press the ma Reset button This operation set the changes in the settings The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user memory If you do not want to delete a song after changing the settings for the individual parts save the song to a floppy disk or to user memory p 101 You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds for each individual part are played or not solo and mute Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs If the following message appears B Recording a Performance If you try to display another screen after you ve changed the O Step 1 Prepare for Recon ding song s settings for each Part a message like the one below may appear Selecting the song to record l Press the Select Listen to a Song button Sono setup was nodified 2 Touch the genre of the song you re recording riginal A change orivinal setup When recording a new song try recording to Favorites 3 Select the song number to which you want to record Touch OK to change
198. is changes the accompaniment pattern Variation without inserting a fill in When this function is used during Automat Arranger Reset 1c Accompaniment the accompaniment re turns to the beginning of the Division p 46 Intro 1 Performs the same function as the Intro Ending button p 54 Intro 1 and Ending 1 Ending 1 are played Intro 2 Performs the same function as the Intro Ending button p 54 Intro 2 and Ending 2 Ending 2 are played Arranger Performs the same function as the Start Start Stop Stop button p 54 Orches This changes the accompaniment to a more trator Up elavorate arrangement p 58 ecd Changes the accompaniment to a simpler ar Down rangement p 58 Melody Turns the Melody Intelligence function on Intelli and off p 60 gence 143 e 2 E xo ij 3 co o T 2 6 o Chapter 8 Various Settings O Functions that can be assigned Pedals Function Explanation Only This starts Automatic Accompaniment with Fade In a fade in where the volume gets progres z Out sively louder ends it with a fade out Function Explanation where the volume gets progressively soft er then stops Pressing the pedal during playback of a song stops the playback When the pedal is Rotary This switches the speed of the rotary effect released playback resu
199. it was before There are some edits that can t be restored AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Undo Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen Undo You are undoing the last editing Copy If you touch lt Cancel gt the undo is cancelled and you re returned to the Song Edit screen If you touch OK the confirmation message appears on screen Touch OK to undone the most recent edit 122 B Copying Measures Copy You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in the same Part or to a measure in another Part This is handy when you re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase Ex To copy measures 5 7 to measure 8 AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Copy A screen like the one shown below appears Item Content Measure number of the first measure of the From segment to be copied For Number of measures to be copied Copy source Track button or part number Choosing All copies all Parts appears in the lt Dst gt column Choosing R Pattern copies the KF 7 s built in Src Rhythm Patterns For more information take a look at Copying Rhythm Patterns to Create Rhythm Parts p 123 If you choose a Track button you can only copy to the selected Track button You cannot copy to the other Track buttons
200. itSet iren cabo ee m pite QS 14 Start Stop button cessisse tinneis eiiis 54 Stretch T nlng anie uen eene ene 139 String Resonance Lisan anaa ng nag neka aka Set tene 140 SiyleC0MpOSeri 5 akan a waana Ba tee teens 130 Style Converter sess 132 Style Orchestrator misisse ani i onien 58 Style Orchestrator button sese 58 Style Searchin ae anaa aga aa anana kaag testes srs 52 SY TNC i A alie et aa MOD ius aa Aa cci a A 54 QS refers to the page number in Quick Start Index T Tap Tempo 5 teet et eo eee 78 Temperament za5 oen eatur ete 139 TOTP Orcs aaa 2 See ots te ee acs I IIIA 41 53 77 Tempo buttons eee 77 Tempo marks eee ete inte rete terreni 41 Tempo MUte 3455 nai ttn ences 79 Tempo R cording heces 128 Tone Buttons etae eoe eei tea 21 Tone List sisi iagad eet ette tete ie e e es Pee ge a 165 TONES 2 5 gne e e eie Qs5 TofieSearchiciie ee eese 23 TONG SCE ze tpe ness ga ga etae i aspire ee ie Perte duet uo 115 Pouch BX Zea RE E OR LR E TAN QS 14 Touch Screen esses eeeeeeeeee eren teneant enn nnns 19 151 Touch the Notes ertet eret eoe enne sees 71 75 Track ASSIGN enacted nr en sche das sn 89 Track ButtOns 3 2 ee Retenir ed edere euet de 81 92 94 Transforme tre asa eee etie eee de eere oak ela 35 Tiansposes co ode cu usando eae oui Seer 85 Transpose Song Edit esee 125 Transpose button
201. ith the notes recorded for another part This process of note at a time This process of making changes in individual exchanging parts is called part exchange notes is called note editing T You can make these corrections by using note editing AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Deleting misplayed notes Part Exchange Changing the scale of a single note A screen like the one shown below appears Changing the force used in playing a single key velocity AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Note Edit A screen like the one shown below appears Note Edit Part 6 EXE Touch each Ka to choose Parts you want to exchange Location Pitch Velocity The note location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat J to select the part with the note to be corrected The Part number appears at the top of the screen Use the lt lt Bwd button and the gt gt Fwd button or use lt ft gt lt amp gt in the upper part of the screen to find the note to be corrected kn 2 I U When you ve found the note you want to correct touch Pitch or Velocity for the note Use the buttons and the dial to correct the pitch or velocity If you want to delete the note touch Delete When you re done making all the se
202. itioned If you touch Del the measure where the cursor is currently positioned is deleted while the measures that follow are moved forward To remove what you have input move the cursor to the position with input you want to delete then touch Clear This deletes the entered setting Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs gt You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song When you add an intro the number of bars corresponding to the length of the intro is inserted automatically Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals and the Performance Pads For instructions on assigning functions refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 Inputting a short Intro and Ending Assign Intro 2 Ending 2 to a pedal or pad Inputting a Variation or Original without a Fill In Assign Original Variation to a pedal or pad Using the keyboard to input slash chords such as Fm C Assign Leading Bass to a pedal or pad Inputting a break somewhere within the song Assign Break to a pedal or pad Check the accompaniment you inserted Here s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as you have input 1 Press the a Reset button to return to the beginning of the song 2 When you press the gt Play Stop button the performance is played back 3 Playback stops when you press the gt Play Stop button once
203. jack of the KF 7 Roland 7 Pedal Cord Half Damper b Switch Control Before You Start Playing Damper Pedal Use this pedal to sustain the sound While the pedal is depressed long lingering reverberations continue to be added to the sound after you release from the keys When you depress the damper pedal on an acoustic piano the sound from the strings that were struck resonates with other strings adding rich reverberations and broadness to the sound You can adjust this resonance Sympathetic Resonance when the damper pedal is depressed You can vary the amount of resonance applied when the damper pedal is depressed Refer to Adjusting Resonance Resonance p 138 Sostenuto Pedal When this pedal is depressed reverberations are applied only to the keys being played at that time Soft Pedal This pedal is used to make the sound softer Playing with the soft pedal depressed produces a sound that is not as strong as when otherwise played with the equivalent strength This is the same function as the left pedal of an acoustic piano gt When connected to the Sostenuto jack or the Soft jack you can also assign other functions to the connected pedal For more information see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions p 143 gt By providing two more pedals you can use three pedals at the same time If you wish to p
204. k at the same tempo and start and stop at the same timing is called synchronization 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch lt Functions gt 3 Touch lt MIDI Sync gt The following screen is appeared 2 MD Sunc SSS 4 Touch to make the setting Displayed Meaning Adjustment of the KF 7 s tempo and starting Int and stopping of playback and recording is performed by the KF 7 The KF 7 s tempo as well as the starting and stopping of playback and recording is con trolled by the MIDI device connected to the Ext KF 7 s MIDI In connector When there is no MIDI device connected then tempo chang ing operation can not be controlled by the KF 7 Playback and recording of songs is con Remote trolled by the connected MIDI device The KF 7 s tempo as well as the starting and stopping of playback and recording is con Auto trolled by the MIDI device connected to the KF 7 s MIDI In connector When there is no MIDI device connected then these opera tions can be performed by the KF 7 Unless the above is set to either Int or Auto the KF 7 s buttons cannot be used to adjust the KF 7 s tempo Ordinarily you should set this to Int Touch Exit to go back to the Function screen Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments MIDI Ensemble Yo
205. k cannot store the format or save any An excessive amount of performance data has been Error 03 data Erde sent to KF 7 in one time and therefore could not be Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure recorded Change the tempo more slowly to record 7 the performance again The data cannot be saved onto this floppy disk be Error 04 cause the format is different Use the floppy disk in The Computer switch is set to a wrong position or the same format the computer is set wrongly Switch off the KF 7 7 Error 43 then set the Computer switch to the correct position A new song cannot be written on this song Select a Error 05 different song number or use a different floppy venia LA a eet eae the KF 7 again disk and repeat the procedure X A There may be a problem with the system Repeat No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive n a Error 10 the procedure from the beginning If it is not solved Insert the disk correctly and repeat the procedure Error 51 after you have tried several times contact the Ro There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk land service center Error 11 or User memory for the data to be saved Insert a different floppy disk or delete files on user memory and repeat the procedure The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive can t be read Be sure you re using Roland SMF Music Files Error 12 or other music files compatible with Roland digital pianos p 181 Also if you want to save
206. le any User Style you ve previously recorded is lost If you do not want to delete the Style save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 135 The following data is saved to the User Style If a song includes data other than this the results you get might not be what was intended Keyboard performance data e Amount of Reverb effect applied e Amount of Chorus effect applied O Creating a Style in Manual Mode When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode you can clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each individual chord Points to note when creating songs Record your performance with the three chord types of diminished seventh major and minor tis convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer Chords Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp 1 2 3 Major D 10 3 4 5 6 Seventh 2 7 8 9 Minor 12 13 14 15 The chords all share the same Rhythm Part gt If you want to use the performance of other part check out Changing an Extracted Part p 134 Creating songs 1 Use the 16 track sequencer to record the song Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer p 113 and other related sections When using music data first select a song p 65 134 Displaying the Style Converter screen 2 Press the Menu button
207. ll Track button or part number to be transposed All performance data including notes tempos Tr P Tones switches volume changes etc are erased r Pt When All is selected the same portion of all parts is transposed Tempo E Tempo data is erased Erasing the tempo data for The range of transposition all measures results in a single constant tempo Bias You can select the range to transpose the data from 24 two octaves down to 24 two oc Event Prog Change E taves up adjustable in semitones Erases the data for switching Tones p 122 You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and Note Erases only notes sound effect sets such as the Rhythm Track Except Notes Erases all of the performance data except for the B Making Measures Blank Hotes Era se Expression You can delete the performance data in a specified block of Erases Expression volume change information measures turning them into blank measures without reducing the length of the song This process is called erasing Ex To erase measures bars 5 8 BABE oe ENEXERES 617 Ee DLE A Blank measures Follow the steps in Selecting the editing function p 121 to choose Erase 125 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Exchanging Parts E Correcting Notes One by One Part Exchange Note Edit You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part You can make corrections in a recorded performance one w
208. lume Balance for Each The Split icon reverts to black and the split performance is cancelled Performance Part Part When you play the keys only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded Balance p 63 25 Chapter 1 Performance Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously e g Q lt U Turning on both layer performance and split performance allows you to split the keyboard into two sections while playing two layered Tones in the right hand part J 108 New Sons B Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps Octave Shift 26 When using layer performance p 24 or split performance p 25 you can change the pitch of the keyboard s sound in octave units This function is called Octave Shift For example when using a layer performance you can change the pitch of each sound and layer the sounds You can make the pitch of the keyboard s left hand part match the pitch of the right hand part during split performance On the Basic screen touch Layer or Split The KF 7 switches to layer performance or split performance To apply Octave Shift touch the name of the tone you ve selected Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen EX St Harp nos 4 Oct Strinos IA Touch Octave lt gt or lt gt in the lower part of the screen to adjust the pitch of the sound Each time you touch lt gt the pitch is raised one octave Each tim
209. ment Startand Otop sisse teet 54 Sync Start cect es heh eet ed atin NG Aga Na Ah oe 54 Advanced 3D x ib He tei es ena ata 28 Advanced 3D button eese 28 Arranger Config 5m ohm scie eed tene 145 ASOME iecit TE ASA ee ri eere edes a a 103 Audio Equipment etc eee eripiet ied 157 Auto Punch In Out 1 rete toten etnia esah aan then 119 Automatic Accompaniment esse een 46 B Balance saning aa e ee re t n ee i iet Eee eae 63 Balance Knob 3 aiia ab de aieo bert 63 Bank Select LSB essere enne 156 Bank Select MSB cete E e reed eure tad 156 Basic Screen ee e e e pede 19 Basic tempo casussen a ah apa saa ga aa tenete ied 128 Bass TONG tenete E rece ee a tru elei aas 55 145 Beat Metronome viet e a et ch eee hi ec Ee ee deed 41 Rhythm ia ANE IN AN KANAN KN PES etit ote 44 Beat Itidicatot ire eene ettet ederent ee nn a ae 150 B at EED s A S ee utei e e a e rete etin tuns 150 Beat Map sasada esai dndn an aga ang Nang and akan an ganda nagane 127 Bend Range sxc gawa sk ga I ener 145 Blank Recording 2 5 emen IP tee deren 118 Brilliance knob cessere enne 18 Bwa button i2 eerie Renee 66 C Calibrations ss 5 epa d E eag aga reci sedia 151 Chord Firidet saka nene eee ene 49 Chord Intelligence eese 48 Chord List sisaning insa adana gun ga ag ena tne e ede rte dae aia 174 Chord Sequencer ss sasae aaa saka a ten eevee tied ied 120
210. mes from the begin Slow Fast when you perform with an organ Tone ning of the measure that was playing when Replay the pedal was pressed When the pedal is While the pedal or Performance Pad is held pressed in rapid succession the playback down the pitch of the sound drops tempo will resume backs up the same number of Glide rarily returning to the original pitch when measures as the number of times the pedal is the pedal or Pad is released This can be ef pressed fective for simulating the performance of in str ents likea Hawaiian guitar ee The pedal functions as a soft pedal p 17 Compos f er Start Performs the same function as the W Upper The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal Stop Play Stop button p 65 Sostenuto p 17 Page Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score ap Lower Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds Fwd 1 pearing on the display to the next page Damper in the left hand side of the keyboard while the performance of a song is stopped gt Bend Up This raises the pitch of notes you play on the Page Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score ap keyboard Bwd 1 pearing on the display to the preceding page 8 while the performance of a song is stopped end This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the Down keyboard Punch In During Punch in Recording this starts and Out stops recording p 119 When the pedal is pressed during a layer per formance the Tone volume changes between Ta
211. mony to the Right Hand Part Melody Intelligence 60 Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance Lower Tone eese tette 61 Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added Piano Style Arranger ssssssssssessseeeeeeneneneteten 62 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part Balance 63 Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard Balance Knob sss 63 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part Part Balance eot ae eine eerie 63 13 Contents Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions 65 Playing a Song a a haaa nge Aka ap aaa ngana aa sa a ad daa gase 65 Using Keywords to Search for Songs Song Search 67 Registering the Songs You Like Favorites 68 Removing Songs from Favorites sss 69 Displaying the Score anssen een nanie 70 Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds Touch the Notes eerte eeann 71 Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display 72 Saving Scores as Image Data sssssssssssses 73 Practicing Songs with the Practice Function 74 Adjusting the Tempo 77 Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time Tap Tempo 78 Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo Vocal Tap Tempo aaa anan AN eag a naa A a aan 79 Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute 79 Match t
212. mpaniment then you should use the Track buttons for recording Refer to Recording With Accompaniment p 93 Solo Only the selected Part is played back This allows you to prevent the sound for the Muta selected part from playing The performance data for the selected part is Clear deleted This displays the Part Settings screen in Options which you can make detailed settings for each part For details refer to p 114 113 kn 2 6 o Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs Icon Description The Tone Set screen appears For details refer Tone Set top 115 B Modifying the Settings of Each Part You can change the Tones and volume as well as mute the playback for each individual part in songs recorded with the 16 track Sequencer and the internal songs Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are also made up of 16 Parts you can change the settings for the individual Parts and play them back in the same way First select the song for which the settings are to be made p 65 1 Display the 16 track Sequencer screen p 113 2 Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want to make settings Change the settings for the selected Part 4 Touch for the corresponding item to change the setting You can also change the values by touching each parameter slider and then using the buttons and the d
213. n p 146 2 a Touch Switch This sets the KF 7 so that the count sound is not played 80 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Muting Some Parts Before Playing Track Buttons With commercially available music files for piano lessons the part for each hand can MEMp For more on music files refer be played back independently This makes it easy to practice hands separately For to Music Files That the KF 7 example you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same Can Use p 181 right hand part be played or you can practice the left hand part while the right hand part plays A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below 00000 Rhythm Whole Bass lower Upper Accomp Accom Left hand Right hand paniment Part Part fe Y es NEMD By using these Track buttons you can eliminate the sound of specific parts This is E referred to as muting If a single Track button Rd includes more than one By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion you can instrument and you want to mute parts the same way For details refer to Recording While Selecting the Track mute just one of those Buttons Redoing Recordings p 96 instruments take a look at Modifying the Settings of 1 Select the song that you wish to play back p 65 Bach Patt ap TAH
214. n and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Rear side of the disk Write can write new data onto disk Write Protect Tab Protect prevents writing to disk The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them and to protect them from dust dirt and other hazards By using a dirty or dust ridden disk you risk damaging the disk as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be locked have their write protect tab slid to the Protect position before you insert them into the drive on some other unit except the PR 300 or a product in the HP G MT KR or Atelier families or into a computer s drive Otherwise if the write protect tab remains in the Write position when you perform any disk operations using the other device s disk drive such as checking the contents of the disk or loading data you risk rendering the disk unreadable by this unit s disk drive GS G5 is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo ration XGlite Xe is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo ration Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International Bu
215. n also occur with fluorescent light tubes glass doors and other objects In particular this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased and when the sound is played at higher volumes Use the following measures to suppress such reso nance Place speakers so they are 10 15 cm from walls and other surfaces Reduce the volume Move the speakers away from any resonat ing objects When listening through headphones Here a different cause such as resonance produced by the KF 7 would be suspect Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center In the upper range the sound changes abruptly beyond a certain key On an acoustic piano notes in the upper one and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to sound until they decay naturally regardless of the damper pedal There is a difference in the timbre as well Roland pianos faithfully simulate such characteristics of the acoustic piano On the KF 7 the range that is unaffect ed by the damper pedal will change depend ing on the Key Transpose setting The automatic accompaniment doesn t play correctly Can t select a tone or Music Style Touch Exit several times to return to the Basic screen p 19 and then select a tone or Music Style 162 Automatic accom paniment is not heard Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right p 63 Have you pressed the One Touch Progr
216. n be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a floppy disk Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you
217. n be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance GENERAL General MIDI 2 MIN ia il a ae tae The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 GS Format c The GS Format is Roland s set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds provides for the editing of sounds and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features including effects such as reverb and chorus Designed with the future in mind the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when th
218. ng a Floppy Disk 99 Formatting Floppy Disks Format sss 99 SAVING SONGS isane Ne iei rie EE dede ede Ente 101 Deleting Saved Songs sss 104 Copying Songs on Disks to Favorites ssssssss 105 Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to Disks 106 14 Chapter 5 User Program Registration 107 Saving Performance Settings User Program 107 Calling Up Saved User Programs sss 108 Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up 108 Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs 108 Saving the User Program Sets ssssssssssssseee 109 Loading Saved User Program Sets Deleting Saved User Program Sets sss 110 Copying Sets of User Programs on Disks to the User Memory 111 Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to TDISKS aaa kaa A E a Pb a a aaa UE 111 Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PG Numbers tee ae na ah aga e e Hoe 112 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs 113 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer 113 The 16 Track Sequencer Screen 113 Modifying the Settings of Each Part 114 Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre Tone Set teet tete est n 115 Recording a Performance sss 115 Changing the Recording Metho
219. nge Music Styles At Step 3 Procedure p 141 touch One Touch Setting One Touch Setting SASE Suitable Suitable Other Tone Tempo Setting Display Explanation Suitable The suitable tone for a Music Style is Tone selected automatically Suitable The suitable tempo for a Music Style is Tempo selected automatically Other Other settings Style Orchestrator phrases Setting etc are changed automatically Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off All items are set to ON when you turn on the power Parameters switched to OFF highlighted in black do not change even when the Music Style is changed Chapter 8 Various Settings B Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions You can assign a variety of functions to the soft and sostenuto pedals and to the performance pads You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal or pad O Assigning Functions to Pedals At Step 3 Procedure p 141 touch Pedal Setting EESE Pedal Setting ssp T Soft Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Bend Range Touch to assign functions to each of the pedals Pressing the One Touch Program Piano button restores the piano performance functions to the pedals p 16 O Assigning Functions to Performance Pads 1 Press the User Function button and watch the indicator light up
220. ning the screws After removing the music stand don t forget to retighten the screws Connect the Power Cord To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration Cord Hook The cord of the supplied AC Adaptor To the AC Outlet 16 Connecting Pedals Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit 1 Connect the supplied pedals DP 8 to one of the pedal jacks Out e eae 9 T i Computer MIDI I EV 5 DP 8 IS When connected to the Damper jack the pedal can be used as a damper pedal When connected to Sostenuto the pedal can be used as a sostenuto pedal When connected to Soft the pedal can be used as a soft pedal Unplugging a pedal cord from the unit while the power is on may cause the pedal s effect to be applied without stopping Be sure to switch off the power to the unit before attempting to disconnect or connect a pedal cord DP 8 The DP 8 pedal controls the half damper function a must for authentic piano performances Switching the DP 8 s function switch to Continuous allows you to perform using the half damper function Damper Pedal
221. nly the sound ofa particular instru ment in a song does not play Is the light for the Track button extinguished p 81 If the button light is out the music on that track is not heard Press the track button so the light is illuminated Song becomes unstable In certain cases such as when playing songs on disks the song may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used Can t record Have song settings been changed for each Part on the 16 Track sequencer screen p 114 Pressing the ka Reset button doesn t return to the beginning of the song Some music files may contain settings that stop play ata point partway through the song Press the Fd Reset button several times more to return to the beginning of the tune Has a Marker placed in the song p 82 The gt gt Fwd and lt lt Bwd buttons don t work The fast forward and reverse buttons are ig nored while music files is being read in Wait until processing finishes Can t record Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected p 96 Has the setting for Punch in Recording p 119 or Tempo Recording p 128 been made Select the replace recording method p 117 It is not possible to record while the score is being generated Once the unit has finished generating the score i e when the measure number in the screen is no longer highlight ed try the operation once a
222. ns B Piano Screen Immediately after the power is turned on the Piano screen like the one below is displayed For details refer to p 20 4 4 Functions B Basic Screen The following screen is called Basic screen Song name or Tempo Music Style name Beat Measure 34 EB finericanPopl 4 4 M 1 z Pianol cial 1 Ea E e Split The Tone names are selected appear These information are displayed when you use the automatic accompaniment You can usually display this screen by touching lt Exit gt several times Follow either of the procedures described below to display it e Press the One Touch Program Arranger button The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for automatic accompaniment Press the One Touch Program Piano button then press one of the Tone buttons then touch lt Exit gt E Using the Main Icons With the KF 7 you can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do things The on screen graphics that appear three dimensional work like buttons These are called Icons The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows Some screens consist on two or more pages You can display the next page or the previ ous page of the screen by touching these icons Touch this to cancel the currently editing setting or exit the screen that is currently displayed You can usually dis
223. nternal ave i keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices This format is memory making it unusable called i format Saves the song as an SMF Standard MIDI Files Songs saved in MEMD this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can It s a good idea to get into the Save As SMF play SMF music files p 181 A song recorded using commercial music files can t be saved in Save As SMF format for reasons of copyright protection habit of moving the write protect tab on the floppy disk to the Protect position when you ve finished saving your The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more data Keeping the tab at Don t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving process is finished Protect prevents operations f that could erase your songs b Touch Exit to return to the Song File screen Tus A ae mistake Depending on the playback instrument some notes may drop out or sound different 103 t g a lt 9 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Deleting Saved Songs 104 This deletes songs that have been saved on floppy disks or to Favorites To delete a song on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive Press the Disk button Touch File The Song File screen appears Touch Delete A Delete Song screen appears Z Delete
224. ntryWaltz Train Beat Country Song P Country Big Band Swing LooseBigBand Scat Swing 2 Big Serenade Fast Swing Jazzy Choir Organ Swing Dixie Jazz Waltz Dixieland Brush Swing Jazz Quintet Big Band Pop Big Band Hula Hawaiian Cool Swing Scat Swing 1 A Cappella Medium Swing Slow Swing Piano Jazz Swing in Foxtrot 1 Foxtrot 2 Boogie Piano Boogie PianoShuffle Stride Piano Gospel Latin Rhumba 1 Salsa BossaNova 3 Gospel Soft Gospel Gospel Shout Mambo 1 Latin Festa ChaCha 2 Anthem Gospel Pop P Gospel Samba 1 Samba 2 BossaNova 1 BossaNova 2 Fast Bossa Slow Bossa LatinTrumpet Mambo 2 Rhumba 2 ChaCha 1 Son Calypso Tango Plena Bomba Merengue Slow Beguine Beguine Latin Pop Latin Trad Kids Raindrops Music Hall Slow Waltz Kids Shuffle Kids Kids Dance Broadway Stage Waltz Waltzing Circus Little Steps Parade MarchingBand Polka March Irish Tejano Celtic Party Waltz Vienna Waltz Musette Scotland Japan Ireland Festival Cinema WesternMovie Balloon Trip Black amp White SFX Movie Western Screen Fanfare SimpleMarch1 SimpleMarch2 Simple Waltz Kids 4 4 Kids 6 8 Lullaby 4 4 gt x ke 3 2 a 9 un 173 un S D c 7 Q Q E Chord List symbol Indicates the constituent note of chords symbol Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the x p 48 174 C C D
225. o p 65 Displaying the Score screen 2 Press the Score Display button The Score screen appears 3 a Touch Tutor The following Tutor screen appears When you select this function after turning on the power a Touch to play a sample per formance You can change the practice message screen like the one shown in the figure at left appears only once O 2 Practicing Listening to a reference of the Performance First listen to the song you are going to practice Once you re familiar with the song practice it a number of times along with the example 1 a Touch Reference When the Message screen appears touch Close 2 Touch lt L gt b on the screen The example performance is played back Touch lt lt q lt q gt or lt gt gt gt to rewind or fast forward within the practice range Touch lt F4 gt to return to the beginning of the practice range 74 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Touch the Notes the Oy N E When you touch a note on the Practice screen the KF 7 plays that note When you trace along the displayed score with your finger the KF 7 plays the traced segment One Note One Note amp ne Note When you touch lt A gt the KF 7 plays the note currently indicated by the bouncing ball When you touch lt lI or lt II gt you can return or advance one note at a time to check the notes
226. of measures of the count sures i in Indication Description When Repeat is turned Measure This lets you place a marker at the ON on the Marker screen beginning of the measure p 84 this specified whether the count in will This lets you place a marker at the sound each time the range beginning of the beat between the markers is re peated or only the first time Repeat First Every Beat 5 Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the Marker screen 146 Chapter 8 Various Settings B Settings for the Countdown For detailed information about count in refer to Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro Countdown p 56 EXER Countdown Settings B _ oth Track Part Parame aes ter Name Value Description gt Countdown will be added Switch ON OFF ON or not OFF Voice JPN Specify the countdown Sound Voice ENG sound Both Track Specify the track or part that will determine the be Lower Track eae Part ginning of the perfor Upper Track mance when added a Part 1 16 countdown Other Settings You can change the tuning the language shown on the display and other settings to make the KF 7 easier to use B Procedure 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch Functions When you touch Functions on the Basic screen the first p
227. of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class
228. ogram Arranger button is pressed The Sync Start settings go into effect ger BP 2 Playachord on the lower part of keyboard As you play the keys the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously O Changing the intro When set for Sync Start the indicators of both the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button are flashing you can use the following procedure to change the intro or prevent the intro from playing Starting without an intro Press the Intro Ending button and watch the indicator go out Now when you play a chord with the keyboard the accompaniment starts without the intro To start with a short intro added On the Basic screen touch the Intro Ending Type 2 Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard a short intro is played and the accompaniment starts 54 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment O Starting at the press of a button 1 Press the Intro Ending button and Start Stop button simultaneously and the indicators lights go out The Sync Start function is cancelled 2 Playachord on the lower part of keyboard Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing 3 Press the Intro Ending button or the Start Stop button When you press the Intro Ending button the intro plays and the accompaniment starts When you press the Start Stop button the accompaniment starts without the intro When you press the Intro Ending button a
229. on Auf Flugeln des Gesanges 1996 Roland Corporation Mazurka No 5 1995 Roland Corporation Gymnopedie 1 1997 Roland Corporation Etude op25 1 1995 Roland Corporation ClairDeLune 1998 Roland Corporation Etude op10 5 2001 Roland Corporation Dr GradusAdParnassum 1995 Roland Corporation Grande Valse Brillante 1995 Roland Corporation La priere d une Vierge 1996 Roland Corporation Course en Troika 1996 Roland Corporation ToTheSpring 1996 Roland Corporation Valse op64 2 1996 Roland Corporation RadetzkyMarsch 1996 Roland Corporation Traumerei 1996 Roland Corporation MomentsMusicaux 3 1996 Roland Corporation Prelude op28 15 1996 Roland Corporation HarmoniousBlacksmith 1996 Roland Corporation Ungarische Tanze 5 1996 Roland Corporation Turkischer Marsch Beethoven 1996 Roland Corporation NocturneNo 2 1996 Roland Corporation Fruhlingslied 1996 Roland Corporation Praludium 1996 Roland Corporation Jagerlied 1996 Roland Corporation MenuetAntique 1996 Roland Corporation Fur Elise 1996 Roland Corporation Turkischer Marsch Mozart 1996 Roland Corporation 178 All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws Rhythm Pattern List Patterns That Can Be Selected with the Rhythm Button Playing Rhythm p 44 Beat Pattern Name March
230. one When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped and Sync Start p 54 is turned off chords are produced when you play in the left hand side of the keyboard This is called the chord tone and the root of the chord that is played at the same time is called the bass tone At Step 3 Procedure p 141 touch Arranger Config Chord Tone Chord Intel Accomp Bass Tone Touch of each item to make settings Fereme Value Description ter Name Accomp All Music Style parts are played Accomp Only Music Style rhythm Chord amp Bs parts chord Tones and bass Tones are played OFF Acoustic Bs A Bass CymbIl Fingered Bs Bass Picked Bs Tone Fretless Bs Slap Bass Organ Bass Synth Bass 101 Selects the bass Tone or Thum Voice chord Tone When set to Off no tone is played OFF E Piano 1 E Piano 2 Soft E Piano Chord Hard E Piano Tone Slow Strings Strings Choir Doos Voice 145 e 2 g xo 8 i co Chapter 8 Various Settings Parame UE pescado Changing the Settings for the ter Name Count In and Countdown The function that allows the KF 7 to recognize ac 1 Press the Metronome button companiment chords when you press only one The Metronome screen p 40 appears Chord bus Keys during auie d 2 Touch Count In or Countdown i ON OFF matic Accompaniment is Intelli called the Chord Intelli The
231. ong is currently being played it stops the song Rec button Records the performance For more detailed information refer to p 90 lt lt Bwd button Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed When held down the song rewinds continuously gt gt Fwd button Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed When held down the song is forwarded continuously Holding down the gt Play Stop button and pressing the gt gt Fwd button moves you to the end of the song 66 vb If there is recorded song data the Delete song screen appears OK to delete Sono fire uou sure If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete the song touch Cancel and either save the song to a floppy disk p 101 or register the song to the Favorites p 68 When you start playback of songs the measure number on the Basic screen appears in reverse video The performance data is being loaded while the indication is highlighted please wait a few moments for this to be completed MEMp Song Number lt 0 gt In the Song Selection screen the title of the currently selected song appears at 0 Song Number 0 is used by all genres Recorded performances are also stored to 0 The song in Song Number 0 is erased when the power is turned off
232. oration Humoreske 1996 Roland Corporation Blumenlied 1996 Roland Corporation Alpenglockchen 1996 Roland Corporation Menuett Gdur Beethoven 1996 Roland Corporation Venezianisches Gondellied 1996 Roland Corporation Alpenabendrote 1996 Roland Corporation Farewell to the Piano 1996 Roland Corporation Brautchor 1996 Roland Corporation Waterloo 1996 Roland Corporation WienerMarsch 1996 Roland Corporation Le Coucou 1996 Roland Corporation Menuett Gdur Bach 1992 Roland Corporation Spinnerlied 1996 Roland Corporation Gavotte 1996 Roland Corporation Heidenroslein 1996 Roland Corporation ZigeunerTanz 1996 Roland Corporation Cinquantaine 1996 Roland Corporation Csikos Post 1996 Roland Corporation Dolly sDreaming Awakening 1996 Roland Corporation La Violette 1996 Roland Corporation Frohlicher Landmann 1996 Roland Corporation Sonatine36 1 Clementi 1996 Roland Corporation Sonatine20 1 Kuhlau 1996 Roland Corporation SonatineNo 5 Beethoven 1996 Roland Corporation Sonate No 15 1996 Roland Corporation Liebestraume 3 2001 Roland Corporation Etude op10 3 2001 Roland Corporation Je te veux O 1997 Roland Corporation Valse op64 1 2001 Roland Corporation Golliwog sCakewalk O 1995 Roland Corporation Fantaisielmpromptu 2001 Roland Corporation Arabesque 1 1995 Roland Corporation Blauen Donau 1996 Roland Corporati
233. ouch Exit to return to the Song Search screen O Searching by song name 3 Touch By Name Touch By Key to return to the Condition Search screen 4 Decide which character you will use for the search Enter the character you are searching for For example touching ABC in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A B C Touch A 0 to toggle between alphabets and numerals The selected character appears in the middle of the screen 5 a Touch Search The search results appear in the display Touch the song name to select the song Touch Exit several times to return to the previous screen 67 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Registering the Songs You Like Favorites You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to Favorites allowing you to select these songs easily vb Selecting the Song On the KF 7 you can also register songs on floppy disks 1 a Press the Select Listen to a Song button to the Favorites For details The Genre Selection screen or the Song Selection screen appears p 65 refer to Copying Songs on Disks to Favorites p 105 2 Touch the song name to select the song to be registered Registering to Favorites 3 a Touch Add A screen like the one shown below appears This will be registered to m g Q lt s Favorites Mo 1 fire
234. ough the available choices in that character group A B C Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case nua nua English lower case numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch lt Del gt the character at the cursor position is deleted E xz g 2 6 o When you touch Ins a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 1 When you have finished with the name touch Exit Determining the Save Destination 6 a Touch Disk or Favorites Touch Disk if you are saving to a floppy disk touch Favorites if you are saving to Favorites 7 a Touch o select the save destination song number If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song the previously saved song will be erased If you do not want to lose a saved song select a number with no song name indicated in the save destination column 102 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Selecting the tone compatibility format when saving to disks 8 a Touch KF or MT Some Tones are unique to the KF 7 Data that is recorded using these tones may not play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players When you want to save data so that it can be played back on another devices sa
235. ound and touch In addition when you trace part of the score with your finger the traced segment is played back This allows you to easily play back phrases you like 71 Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Making Detailed Settings for the Score Display You can change the part appearing on the score display and change the manner in which the score is displayed 1 Press the Score Display button to display the Score screen 2 Touch Option A screen like the one shown below appears Finger Numbers Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Score screen Chords Pitches Switch the screens or the parameter being set to select the value Item Setting Lyrics ON The lyrics are displayed Sets whether or not the lyrics appear in the music OFF Not displayed Finger Numbers ON The fingering is displayed Whether or not the fingering 7 appears in the music OFF Not displayed Chords ON The chord names are displayed Whether or not chord names appear in the music OFF Not displayed OFF Not displayed Pitches C D E The pitch names C D E are displayed Sets whether or not the note Do Re Mi t l names appear in the music Fixed The pitch names fixed Do are displayed when the score is expanded Do Re Mi The syllable names movable Do are dis M
236. ouo 181 General MIDE2 5 4 kien ek teret ce ae erecti elena ag 181 GS coca i teet dis tie e EP Ee He Estee et ah 181 GS Formater dosene eer eee tete ov cose eoru 181 H Hammer Response nyaga ae a NA ak nnne 140 Hatmonisti s ssara 9603 naa denen eag ea naanin cones 36 Harmony oet son SEO saa ana gan 60 Headphones aate tta e aetates 18 l ICON dst a A ni ut EE ete edere KN OEE A 19 format 2 die eee AA TIN NA 103 Input Jacks eere genet eher 157 Insert Song Edit 5 5 erecto greeted 124 Internal Song last iiti aec etie 176 Intro 5 ERE IRL RUE aaa Eb e Rd ent 46 54 Intro Ending button sese 54 Intto Ending Type oet ette teen teens 54 K Karaoke zung dete Nee aaa 39 Key ngan aaa an ah aan tu had Cn 72 Key Panel perpins tenen eatenus QS3 Key To ch eade tede aaa naak baa watang agan aaa 141 186 L L arngu age 5e nete etie kap ea aaa daa 146 TAY Cb rana aaa na agan a sobs weit aa ank na a pe eie a oi nagane dad ls 24 Layer Set Lazio deat a a anapa nitas QS 14 Layertone erede eee 24 Leading bass eiie e ag in abasa naa Gana apak 144 Local Control 5 3 trn ks angka deen scabies aaa Gan 156 Loop Recording s s tee se ees Ban aaa te 118 Lower Tone 24512 deo itte teet ae edd 61 Ey Tics coe Tana eerie eres D re hebes 72 88 lyTieS icri e ee eite ied e eite 19 M Manual Punch In Out cceccccessecessececesececeececeseeesenaees 119 Marker iue te bee e ea en E eR ene 82 1
237. ovable played Clef L Auto Display is switched automatically Determines whether a treble or Hem anas IE shown ithe score G Clef G treble clef is displayed in the score for the left hand part F Clef F bass clef is displayed in the score Clef R Auto Display is switched automatically Determines whether treble or bass shownin theseore G Clef G treble clef is displayed in the score for the right hand part F Clef F bass clef is displayed in the score Key Auto Key is switched automatically Score is displayed in the 0 specified Sim d A 0 Score is displayed in the specified key 72 MEMp In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering MEMD Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KF 7 s Chord Sequencer p 120 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Item Setting User Part Selects the part to display when User is selected as aie onal Parts 1 16 the part to be displayed Lower Part Lower Track Selects the part to display when Lower is selected as 4 Parts 1 16 the part to be displayed Upper Part Selects the part to display when Upper is selected as PEDE tac Part 1 16 the part to be displayed B Saving Scores as Image Data 1 6 7 You can take scores that are displayed on the KF
238. p You can set the tempo according to the inter two levels depending on how firmly the Tempo val at which the pedal or pad is pressed Pedal EX1 pedal is pressed p 79 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume The layer 7 Tone is played at a fixed volume regardless What is the leading bass function of how forcefully the keys are played The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected as the bass tone is called Leading Bass When this function Pedal EX2 increases the layer Tone volume is turned on the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions Y are used Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as Pressing the pedal with kedal EX9 selected increases the layer Tone volume while the the bass tone Pedal EX3 volume of the left hand Tone is decreased eca The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume ii regardless of how forcefully the keys are What is the rotary effect played This adds a sort of spinning effect tome organ sound similar Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected to the sound when a rotary speaker is used Pedal EX4 increases the layer Tone volume while the Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this volume of the right hand Tone is decreased spinning effect Overall volume level can be controlled Expression A separately sold expression pedal EV 5 needs to be connected 144
239. pedal The soft pedal is dedicated to switching Soft Pedal User Programs The function assigned to the soft pedal cannot be used The sostenuto pedal is dedicated to switch ing User Programs The function assigned to the sostenuto pedal cannot be used Sostenuto Pedal Touch Exit to return to the User Program screen Chapter 5 User Program Registration Saving the User Program Sets You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the User Program button and save them as a set to a floppy disk or to user memory When saving to a floppy disk first insert a floppy disk in the disk drive gt For more on working with the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 99 l Press the User Program button 2 Touch File 3 Touch Save A Save User Program screen like the following appears Save User Prooram B User Program Giving a name to a set of User Programs 4 Touch lt Rename gt The Rename screen appears When you touch When you touch the icon for the character to be input the cursor moves the character appears at the cursor position For example touching the ABC icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group A gt B gt C gt A Each touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case nu numerals
240. performance can be played back to listen to your own playing or to add additional parts Recorded performances are discarded when another song You can use the KF 7 to make the following kinds of recordings is selected or when the power Recording just your own keyboard performance gt Recording a New Song SELON bi sure to saye i tant ances on a New Song p 91 important perform floppy disk Take a look at Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment Saving Songs p 101 2 Recording With Accompaniment p 93 Recording along with the internal songs and songs on disks 2 Recording Along with a Song p 95 Re recording gt Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons Redoing Recordings p 96 O If the following screen appears If you ve recorded a song or changed a song s settings see p 114 the following message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song OK to delete Sono fire uou sure lt kn g 2 6 lt v If it s okay to delete the song touch lt OK gt If you do not want to delete the song touch Cancel and either save the song to a floppy disk p 101 or register the song to the Favorites p 68 90 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording a New Song New Song This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or Automatic Accompaniment et Play
241. play the Ba sic screen by touching lt Exit gt several times When you select an internal song or music files that includes the lyrics data this icon appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics m lyrics The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual 19 7 y A 9 lt nOA 2J0Jog Chapter 1 Performance Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano One Touch Piano You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single button 0 90000 Chapter 1 One Touch Program 1 Press the One Touch Program Piano button A Piano screen like the one shown below will appear J 108 4 4 i NEMb Since this instrument faithfully reproduces real acoustic piano action and response keys played in the top one and one half octave range continue to resonate regardless of the damper pedal action and the tone in this range is audibly different The Key Transpose setting p 85 can also be used to change the range that is When you press the One Touch Program Piano button the KF 7 will switch to the a akan following se
242. poration Sighing 1999 Roland Corporation Chatterbox 1999 Roland Corporation Restlessness 1999 Roland Corporation Ave Maria 1999 Roland Corporation Tarantella 1999 Roland Corporation AngelHarmony 1999 Roland Corporation Gondola Song 1999 Roland Corporation The Return 1999 Roland Corporation The Swallow 1999 Roland Corporation KnightErrant 1999 Roland Corporation Invention 1 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 2 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 3 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 4 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 5 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 6 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 7 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 8 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 9 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 10 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 11 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 12 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 13 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 14 2000 Roland Corporation Invention 15 2000 Roland Corporation Practice Beyer 15 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 21 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 25 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 29 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 34 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 38 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 42 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 46 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 51 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 55 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 60 1996 Roland Corporation Beyer 64 1996 Roland Corporation Bey
243. puter Connector You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program such as Roland Visual MT is installed and save songs recorded on the KF 7 on the computer B Connectors Computer Connector You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange performance data Use a computer cable sold separately to make the connection The type of cable required will depend on your computer Computer Sw itch The setting for this switch is made depending on the computer connected Mac PC 1 PC 2 When this switch is set to MIDI this connector cannot be used B Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections l Turn off the KF 7 and the computer Using a compatible computer cable sold separately connect the Computer connector on the underside of the KF 7 with the computer s serial port 3 Setthe computer switch on the underside of the KF 7 to match the type of computer connected Please refer to the connection examples below Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the power to the unit is off 4 Turn on the KF 7 5 Turn on the computer 6 Make the settings for baud rate transmission speed for the computer and the software For more information on this procedure please refer to the owner s manual for your computer 7 You should also make th
244. quest servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance e In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Donotforce the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other S devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Do not put anything that contains water e g flower vases on this unit Also avoid the use of insecticides perfumes alcohol nail polish spray cans
245. r 4 Recording and Saving the Performance 1 Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive 2 Press the Disk button 3 a Touch File A Song File screen like the one below appears 4 a Touch Format Disk The following screen appears Format Disk zl t g a lt 9 OK to format disk Don t try to take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the formatting process is finished 5 Touch lt OK gt Initialization of the disk begins If Error appears on screen take a look at Error Touch Cancel to go back to the previous screen Messages p 164 When initialization is completed you re returned to the previous screen 100 Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance Saving Songs A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose another song Storing recorded performances and other data to floppy disks or the Favorites is called saving Be sure to save important songs to floppy disks or MEM Favorites When using a new floppy disk What are Favorites first initialize format the disk on the KF 7 Take a look at Formatting Floppy Disks Format p 99 You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to Favorites allowing you to select these songs easily p 68 On the KF 7 when you register a song on a floppy disk to Favorites you can then play back
246. reen p 117 select Loop Touch Exit to return to the menu screen The recording method changes to loop recording 3 Press the Rec button 4 Press the Track button for the track to be recorded The KF 7 is put in recording standby 118 5 Press the W Play Stop button to begin recording Recording starts from Marker A When the song reaches Marker B it then returns to Marker A where recording continues Each time the recording is looped the newest sounds are layered over previously recorded sounds 6 When you press the gt Play Stop button recording stops After you have finished with loop recording return to the usual replace recording mode p 117 Loop Recording Shortcut You can also use the method described below to set Loop Recording 1 Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 82 If you haven t recorded anything yet then perform Blank Recording for the necessary number of measures before placing the markers Touch the lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen p 82 This sets the loop recording mode Start a recording After you have finished with loop recording touch the lt Repeat gt icon in the Marker screen once more to return to the usual replace recording mode Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Re
247. reen so text may not be displayed when the ambient tem perature is below freezing Vertical lines ap pear in the screen Color is washed out at the edges of the screen These occur due to the nature of a liquid crys tal display and do not indicate a malfunction They can be minimized by adjusting the brightness of the screen p 19 The touch screen doesn t respond correctly The positioning of the touch screen may be come displaced if some time has passed since it was last used Take a look at Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen p 151 to correct the positioning No sound is heard Is the volume level of the KF 7 p 18 or con nected device turned all the way down Are headphones plugged in p 18 Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right or left Has the volume been set to 0 using the Part Balance p 63 Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the minimum level p 30 Has the footage been adjusted so that all fre quency components aren t sounded p 15 in the Quick Start Depressing a ped al has no effect or the pedal effect doesn t stop Is the pedal connected correctly Make sure the pedal cord is securely connect ed to the pedal connector on the rear of the unit p 16 Has a different function been assigned to the pedal See Assigning Functions to Pedals and Per formance Pads Pedal Setting User
248. rged score You can also display the note names The score and keyboard are displayed This allows you to check the keys that are pressed for the sounds played back Selects the part for which the score is displayed You can specify the track or part to be displayed with lt Option gt p 72 Makes detailed settings for the score display p 72 This allows you to practice the song repeatedly while reading the music p 74 lt Replay gt The soft pedal functions as the Replay When you press the pedal during the playback of the song playback stops and when you release the pedal playback resumes starting at the beginning of that measure When the pedal is pressed in rapid succession playback is returned the same number of measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed In situations such as when you want to hear a difficult phrase repeated a number of times you can press the pedal to go to an earlier point in the song 70 MEMD In some internal songs the fingering is displayed The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering vb Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KF 7 s Chord Sequencer p 120 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions 3 a Press the gt Play Stop button Playback of the song begins and the score advances along with the progression of No notes
249. risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precautions Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable Before Using Floppy Disks Handling the Floppy Disk Drive Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk rendering it unusable The disk drive s indicator will light up at full brig
250. rts The KF 7 features numerous internal rhythm patterns You 2 3 Note data after quantization Example Sixteenth note resolution Actual note data TIT 1 4122 2213 14j AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select Note data after quantization j a l lt Quantize gt can copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part A screen like the one shown below appears For more information about the name of Rhythm Patterns please refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 179 uatize SSS At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select lt Copy gt For All Tr Pt All R esolution 1 16 For more about ordinary copying please refer to Copying Measures Copy p 122 Select Rhythm Pattern as the lt Src gt This makes the setting for copying a built in Rhythm Pattern opy SS Ptn March 2 2 Mode Replace Item Content For From Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be quantized For Number of measures to be quantized Track button or part number to be quantized Tr Pt Choosing All quantizes the same passage The rhythm pattern s name and measure count are in all Parts indicated in the From column a The Dst is fixed at Part 10 Quantization timing W
251. s These connectors can be used to connect the KF 7 to an external device for even greater versatility Aseparate publication titled MIDI Implementation is also available It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit If you should require this publication such as when you intend to carry out byte level programming please contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor B Connectors T Out In MIDI N 9 MIDI Out Connector Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI connector No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT MIDI In Connector Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable sold separately This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external MIDI devices The KF 7 receiving MIDI messages can output sounds exchange tones and perform other operations External MIDI devices can t be used for remotely changing the Tones played by the KF 7 s keyboard 153 a kn 2 6 U Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices Making the Connections To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before
252. s a blank measure p 124 Trans Pr pose Transposes parts individually p 125 Erase Erases data in measures creating p 125 blank measures Part Exchange Exchanges the sounds in parts p 126 Note Edit Allows corrections to be made p 126 note by note Allows editing of the Tones d d changes that occur during a song pute 121 ba 8 2 6 o Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs gt PC stands for Program Change which is a command that tells an instrument to change the sound it s using With songs that rely on the use of a variety of sounds a PC needs to be located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be changed Some edits can t be undone not even by choosing Undo We recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before editing For more on how to save songs refer to Saving Songs p 101 Editing 4 Touch the item to be edited The value for the item being edited is highlighted 5 Set the value with the buttons or the dial To cancel the operation once it is underway touch lt Exit gt 6 When you re done making all the settings touch lt Execute gt When you are finished editing the setting return to the Song Edit screen Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Menu screen B Undoing Edits Undo You can cancel an editing operation that you ve just carried out This is handy when you want to undo an edit and restore data to the way
253. sage over and over layering sounds with each pass This method is called Loop Recording This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part For example use this method to make a Loop Recording of a four measure segment First record the bass drum the snare drum next then the hi hat and so on layering a different instrument onto the same four measures After you have finished recording the four measure rhythm pattern you can then use the procedure in Copying Measures Copy p 122 to create as many copies of the four measures as you need to complete your Rhythm part l Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice Marker p 82 If you haven t recorded anything yet then use Blank Recording to create the necessary number of measures before placing the markers What is Blank Recording Blank Recording is recording a number of silent measures with no content 1 Set the basic tempo and beat of the song 2 Hold down the Rec button and press the m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and m Play Stop buttons both light up and recording starts Without performing anything record only the required number of measures then press the m Play Stop button The indicators for the Rec and e m Play Stop buttons both go out and recording stops 2 In the Rec Mode sc
254. securing the unit to the stand have not become loose Fasten them again securely whenever you notice any loosening Disconnect the power cord Disconnect all cords coming from external devices Remove the music stand Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 17 o Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the o outlet Should you remove the screws fastening the music rest make sure to put them in a safe place out of o children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power If you need to turn off the power completely first
255. semitone Reverb 16 types 127 levels Effects Chorus 8 types 127 levels Sympathetic Resonance Rotary and 45 other types Advanced 3D Physical Damper Simulation Advanced Resonance Equalizer 5 bands Master level lt Arranger gt Music Styles Style Search by terms and by letters 6 groups 204 styles x 4 types Style Orchestrator Music Assistant Search by terms and by letters Over 130 sets x 4 presets Programmable Music Styles Style Converter Style Composer Melody Intelligence 24 types Control Start Stop Intro Ending 2 types for each styles Sync Start Fill In Variation Original Arranger Reset Countdown Count In Melody Intelligence Break Leading Bass No Chord Fade in out Half Fill In Variation Original Chord Intelligence Style Orchestrator lt User Programs gt Internal 36 Disk Max 99 sets lt Rhythm Partner gt Metronome Rhythm Tempo Quarter note 20 250 Beat 2 2 0 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 3 8 6 8 9 8 12 8 Volume 10 levels Metronome Pattern 11 patterns Metronome Sound 8 types Rhythm Pattern 59 patterns lt Composer gt Tracks 5 tracks 16 tracks Song 1 song Note Storage Approx 30 000 notes Resolution 120 ticks per quarter note Recording Method Realtime Replace Mix Auto Punch In Manual Punch In Loop Tempo Step Chord Sequencer Beat Map Edit Copy
256. siness Machines Corporation All product names mentioned in this document are trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Introduction Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KF 7 Intelligent Piano While the KF 7 Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances it also features easy to use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety Main Features O Piano Sounds with Rich Resonance and Wide Ranging Expressiveness The stereo sampling piano sound generator realistically reproduces even the sound of the hammers striking the strings producing the tones of a high quality concert grand piano Maximum polyphony of 128 notes ensures that you can use the pedal freely without running out of notes Moreover since the included pedal DP 8 allows use of half damper techniques you can enjoy piano performances that are even richer and more expressive O Pursuing the Playing Feel of a Grand Piano These instruments feature a progressive hammer action keyboard which duplicates the touch of a grand piano with a heavier touch in the lower register and a lighter touch in the upper register O Get Easy Results with the Main Buttons You can play songs display scores play the Automatic Accompaniment select
257. so do not allow lighting devices that normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit such as a piano light or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit Any accumulation of dust between the AC adaptor and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire Periodically wipe away such dust with a dry cloth Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Do not allow rubber vinyl or similar materials to remain on the unit for long periods of time Such objects can discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Do not paste stickers decals or the like to this instrument Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish Maintenance To clean the unit use a dry soft cloth or one that is slightly dampened Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount of strength moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory ca
258. sound of a robot s voice Duck Transforms the input into a duck s quacking sound Alien Transforms the input into an alien voice Computer Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer Female Transforms male voices into female voices Male Transforms female voices into male voices 3 Sing through the microphone Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected Cancelling the Effect 4 Once again touch the icon you selected in Step 2 The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated Touch lt Exit gt to return to the Vocal Effects screen 35 Chapter 1 Performance O Adding Harmonies Harmonist MEMD You can sing with a harmony accompaniment even when you re playing solo This When you use the Harmonist is called the Harmonist function function the resonance setting for the piano see p 138 may 1 sometimes be reset And the Hi Hd 14 n Touch lt Harmonist gt in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 effects applied to the keyboard p 32 may be canceled e g Q lt s Duet ct Up Oct Down Keyboard Sth Up 3rd Up 4th Down Chords 2 Touch any one of the icons Here s what the different icons do Display Explanation Duet Provides an effect resembling the sound of two people singing the same melody Oct Up Adds another voice one octave higher than the original Oct Down Adds another voice one oc
259. t random order When you touch lt hgs41 gt all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played in order starting from the selected song When the last song is finished playback resumes from the initial song gt Information for the selected song is displayed gt The selected song is played back This changes to x gt while the song is played back playback stops when you touch a gt gt The song genre changes 2 Touch the name of the song to be played back The selected song name appears at 0 You use the buttons and the dial to select songs Playing back 3 Pressthe m Play Stop button The button indicator lights up and playback of the song begins Stopping the Song 4 Pressthe m Play Stop button once again The button indicator light goes out and the song stops When the song is finished playback stops automatically Press the Ha Reset button to return to the beginning of the song Record Playback Buttons 00000 Menu Rhythm Whole Bass Lower Upper comp Record Playback SA Track buttons Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button Use these buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played For more detailed information refer to p 81 4 Reset button Returns to the beginning of the song gt Play Stop button Plays back the song or if the s
260. t NEMD Styles By changing the tempo and 4 Tone you can enjoy Touch Preset lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt or D in the lower part of the screen performing with a different When the Music Style is selected Preset A is selected ambience even in the same Music Style When any of the Presets from lt A gt through lt D gt are selected the Music Style tempo kaa right hand Tone Style Orchestrator settings p 58 and other settings change 50 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment 5 Touch lt Exit gt The display returns to the Basic screen When you play a chord in the left hand part of the keyboard the selected Music Style is automatic B Selecting Music Styles on Disks You can play other User Styles saved to floppy disks or User memory p 135 Ji 2 z adeyyo Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive p 99 MEMD If you re using the disk drive for the first time be sure to Press the Music Style User button read the important notes on p 6 0 Kids 4 4 When you touch lt User Disk gt on the lower part of the screen the screen for selecting user memory or disk Styles appears When you touch lt Preset gt the screen for selecting Trad Kids Music Styles appears Touch E The Music Styles saved on the disk are displayed When you touch lt gt the Music Styles stored in User memory are displayed Select a Music Style and
261. t the Tempo Vocal Tap Tempo Just as in Tap Tempo Function p 78 you can set tempos using your voice This feature is called Vocal Tap Tempo MEMD Vocal Tap Tempo does not 1 Connect a microphone p 18 function well when the mic volume is too low Adjust the 2 a Press the Metronome button volume level with the Mic Volume knob 3 Touch Vocal Tap Vocal Tap Tempo SSS AAN J 134 Ed MEM You can start the song by Count into the mic at desired tempo the music then plaus at that tempo microphone For more detailed giving the count through the information refer to Enabling e 2 ij the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice 4 Countto four One two three four into the mic Vocal Count In p 37 The tempo is set to the beat you used speaking into the microphone The new tempo setting is indicated in the screen After setting the tempo touch Exit and you re returned to the Metronome screen B Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo Tempo Mute If a song has tempo changes it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo Overriding tempo changes is called Tempo Muting 1 Hold down the m Play Stop button and press one of the Tempo buttons When tempo muting is in effect the tempo display appears in reverse video Cae Grand Pianol When you play back the song it will play at a const
262. tandard This replicates the resonance inside a piano The KF physically reproduces the vibra tion of other free strings when keys are played allowing you to experience the feel ing of acoustic piano reverberation and res onance Physical Damper Simulation Advanced In addition to the effects of Advanced this also replicates the noise produced when you depress the pedal Demo Touch the Standard Advanced or Demo icon to choose the type of resonant sound Touch Level n to adjust the amount of effect applied Touch t to deepen the effect When you touch the effect is lessened gt The Resonance settings may change when you use the Transformer p 35 and Harmonist p 36 vocal effects When you ve chosen Demo touching Exit changes the setting for resonant notes to Advanced Chapter 8 Various Settings B Changing the Tuning Tuning O Choosing the Tuning You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic temperaments tuning methods Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal temperament the most common tuning in use today But at one time there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition was created you can experience the sonorities of chords originally intended for that song AtStep 3 in Procedure p 138 touch Tuning Tuning
263. tave lower than the original Keyboard The melody being played on the keyboard becomes the harmony 5th Up Adds harmony a fifth above the original 3rd Up Adds harmony a third above the original 4th Down Adds harmony a major fourth below the original Chords Adds harmonies matching the chords designated with the keys Cancelling the Effect 3 Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again The Harmonist function is cancelled Touch Exit to go back to the Vocal Effects screen 36 Chapter 1 Performance O Enabling the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice Vocal Count In You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the microphone 1 Touch Vocal Count In in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect p 33 Vocal Count n SSS 1 2 3 4 S o 0 0 o EN J 108 I 491deu5 Arranoer Start Auto Accompaniment Start Sono Playback 2 Touch lt Arranger gt or lt Song gt Display Explanation Arranger Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count Song The song starts at the tempo used for the count 3 Count to four One two three four into the mic Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song or Music Style For example if you select a time signature of 4 4 then count to four count to three when 3 4 time is selected The
264. ted device After use turn off the power using the following procedure 1 Turn the volume all the way down on the KF 7 and on the device you re about to connect 2 Turn off the KF 7 3 Turn off the connected equipment 158 Connecting a Computer B Connect to the MIDI Connectors You can use a USB MIDI interface cable sold separately to connect the KF 7 to your computer If the KF 7 is connected to a computer in which sequencer software such as Roland s Visual MT is installed a song you ve recorded on the KF 7 can be saved on your computer Connection examples To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections In order to make connections to your computer you must install MIDI driver software on your computer For details refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI interface Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of the KF 7 Set the Computer switch on the KF 7 s rear panel to MIDI then turn on the power to the KF 7 USB Connector of your Computer c Dm UM 1 etc gu MIDI OUT MIDI IN 4 o o t 9 Ou n MIDI Pedal Line In Computer F 7 Chapter 9 Connecting External Devices E Connect to the Com
265. th Location Tongnarmo e measure number appears in the top rig ea of the screen The PC location display uses Measure Beat Tick as the Touche bM maw tothe beginning of the song format A tick is a unit of time that s shorter than a beat Touch lt Pl gt to move to the end of the song Touch g J to select the part with the program change to be edited The Part number appears at the top of the screen 5 Touch Execute The beat change starts with the measure you selected Use the lt lt Bwd button and the gt gt Fwd button or Repeat Steps 3 5 to make beat settings in other measures use ft gt lt gt in the upper part of the screen to find the Mew program change to be edited Recording the performance When you ve found the Program Change you want to 9 P modify touch Tone Name on the screen 6 Touch lt Exit gt twice Press a Tone button to select a Tone group then select a Tone The screen displayed before you pressed the Menu with the buttons and the dial When selecting Part 10 button appears or 11 select the drum set or effect sound 7 Press the Reset button to return the measure If you want to delete the Program Change touch lt Delete gt number to 1 When you re done making all the settings touch Exit 8 Start a recording Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 4 Recording and Saving the Performance p 90 Sp
266. th 16 Parts 16 Track Sequencer Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously recorded material while continuing to add performances of other parts The KF 7 is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen parts Since each part s performance is recorded using one tone you can layer performances using up to sixteen tones for the data in one song The function used to layer these sixteen parts one at a time is called the 16 Track Sequencer 16 Track Sequencer You can record performances for up to 16 parts overlaying them part by part to create a single song Part 1 Flute Part art 2 aor A Part pim 3 Piano Part left hand art 4 Piano Part right hand wa 16 Track Seguencer and Track Buttons In addition to the 16 Track Seguencer function the Track Buttons p 81 are another of the unit s playing recording functions These five Track buttons are used for organizing the 16 Track Sequencer s sixteen parts This allows you to use the 16 Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances recorded with the Track buttons and make even more detailed edits of the songs You can easily play back the original song data with the 16 Track Sequencer mute parts by pressing the Track buttons and more Commercially Available Music Files Commercially available song file recorded in Roland s SMF format is also composed of sixteen parts By loading the song file from
267. the accompaniment moves ahead to the Variation ag variation Ending The conclusion of a song In addition Music Styles are built from Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 46 NEMb For instructions on playing the Automatic Accompaniment refer to Selecting Music Styles Music Style Buttons p 50 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Arranger Here s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment One Touch Program 1 Press the One Touch Program Arranger button MEMD s When you select an internal The Basic screen like the one shown below appears 4 uu song or music file that includes e 2 E ij N n the lyrics data lyrics KZ finericanPopl T E appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to Grand Pianol 1 display the lyrics MEMD Normally when you change a Music Style the tempo and tone change to selections that go well with the selected Music Style If you do not want Observe the settings to change the tempo and tone e The keyboard is split into left and right hand parts with accompaniment refer to Changing Music chords specified for the left hand side of the keyboard Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo One Touch Setting p 142 vb 2 Playachord on t
268. the floppy disk and using the 16 Track Sequencer you can then also edit the song file gt Although with commercially available Roland SMF music data Part 11 is included in the 2 Bass Accomp track button other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons With some commercially available music files you cannot edit the data B The 16 Track Sequencer Screen When recording with 16 track Sequencer display the 16 track Sequencer screen l Press the Menu button The Menu screen appears 2 Touch lt 16trk Sequencer gt A 16 track Sequencer screen like the one shown below appears Icon Description Touch to select the part to be recorded or the The Track buttons correspond to 16 track sequencer parts as elis shown below 16 part whose settings are to be changed The ee Part you choose appears is highlighted Track bunton RAE This Part to be played back R Rhythm D 10 S 11 1 Whole 1 I The Part not to be played back Muted Part 2 Bass Accomp 2 5 9 12 16 3 Lower 3 Parts that do not have performance data re 4 Upper 4 corded to them Since the 16 Track Sequencer records one tone to one part you cannot use Layer performance p 24 Split performance p 25 or other such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously Also you can t record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment When you want to record with Automatic Acco
269. the use of the disk drive refer to Using Floppy Disks p 99 1 Press the User Program button 2 Touch lt File gt 3 Touch lt Delete gt A Delete User Program screen like the following appears Z Delete User Prooram A a ter rr 4 Touch Disk or User Touch Disk if you are deleting User Programs from a floppy disk touch User if you are deleting User Programs from the user memory to select the set of User Programs to be deleted 6 Touch Delete A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file fire uou sure 7 Touch OK The selected User Programs are deleted Touching Cancel cancels deleting the file Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable Chapter 5 User Program Registration Copying Sets of User Programs on Disks to the User Memory You can copy sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks and to user memory You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user memory and to floppy disks 1 Insert the disk with the settings to be copied in the disk drive 2 Touch the User Program button Touch File 4 Touch Copy A Copy User Programs screen like the following appears Copy User Program E3 Disk Specifying the copy so
270. to make the Tempo Recording settings 1 Use the lt lt Bwd and gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure where you want to change the tempo The measure number appears in the top right area of the Basic screen 2 Press the Rec button and watch the indicator is flashing The KF 7 is put in recording standby 3 Use the buttons or the dial to change the tempo 4 Press the W Play Stop button The song s tempo changes starts with the measure you selected gt While tempo recording is being used to write tempo the tempo display in the screen will be highlighted 5 When you press the gt Play Stop button the change in tempo stops You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode When you re finished tempo recording go back to the ordinary Replace Recording Take a look at Changing the Recording Method Rec Mode p 116 f you want to restore the previous tempo delete the tempo data at the place where the tempo was recorded For an explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings refer to Making Measures Blank Erase p 125 Tempo Recording Shortcut Hold down the amp Rec button and press one of the Tempo buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording settings Record tempo information In this case tempo recording is canceled when recording ends 129 M x 2 I o Chapter 7 Creating Music Styl
271. touch of lt A a 0 gt cycles the type of characters through English upper case English lower case Hou numerals symbols then back to English upper case When you touch Del the character at the cursor position is deleted When you touch Ins a space is inserted at the cursor position 5 When you have finished with the name touch Exit Determining the save destination 6 Touch Disk or User Touch Disk if you are saving to a floppy disk touch User if you are saving to user memory 135 4 ST IST M kn 2 6 U Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles o select the save destination number If a Style name is displayed a style is already saved to that number If you select a number with a previously saved User Style and then save to that number the previously saved User Style is deleted If you do not want to delete the User Style being saved select a number in the save destination column that does not yet have a name 8 Touch lt Save gt The saving process starts Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable 136 B Deleting Saved User Styles This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks or in user memory When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 1 Press the Music
272. touch the Music Style name Press the One Touch Program Arranger button On the KE 7 you can save You can now perform in the selected Music Style multiple user Styles to user Music Styles selected from floppy disks are stored until the power is turned off Even after ejecting the floppy disk by pressing the Music Style User button you can memory Take a look at Saving a User Style p 135 perform using the most recently selected Music Style 51 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment B Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles Style Search You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song musical genre or MEM other criteria you set Only the KF 7 s internal Music You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names Styles are searchable 1 a Press one of the Music Style buttons 2 Touch Search The following Style Search screen appears Condition Search screen Name Search screen gt Style Search Z Style Search ZEE Specify initial letter of keyword to search then touch lt Search gt N g Q lt U MEMp In a condition search the KF 7 O Searching by Conditions looks for Music Styles satisfying all of the selected Touch here to switch these screens 3 Touch the parameter you want to set then use the buttons and the search criteria dial to select the search conditions 4
273. ts The Effect screen appears mmHg Effects SSS _ Selecting a different effect for the left hand Tone than the one applied to the right hand Tone and Layer Tone may not result in the effect you want Select the same effect as that used for the right hand Tone 127 Depth Applying effects to the sound 3 Touch ON When you select an effect type that starts with GS that type The effect selected with Type will be applied of effect is also applied for the Setti ng the Effect chorus effect for the song or Music Style p 46 selected at that time 4 Touch Type K s to select the type of effect 5 Touch Depth n to adjust the amount of effect applied The amount increases as the value is raised You can also move the slider with the buttons and the dial Pressing the buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value Touch Exit to return to the Tone selection screen 32 Chapter 1 Performance Cancelling the Effect MEM 6 a On the Effects screen touch Off Al Voice button fones witha GS or d logo appearing after the tone name have the About the Effect Settings same effect applied to them If When the effects is set to ON the appropriate effect is applied for the currently the effect for one of the tones selected sound You can also apply different effect types to each tone except GS with the GS or a lo
274. ttings regardless of the current panel settings pum If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections p 25 the keyboard returns to a single section MEMO The pedals return to their usual functions p 16 p 143 You can change the piano The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected performance settings by touching Functions on the The effect is automatically set to Sympathetic Resonance p 32 T meee ee Changing the Piano Sound take a look at Changing the R Settings for One Touch Piano Touch the piano lid on the screen and listen to the tone change as you slide your p 138 finger or touch or to open and close the lid This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano MEMD is set at different heights When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data lt lyrics gt appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen Touch this to display the lyrics 20 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with a Variety of Tones Tone Buttons vb The KF 7 comes with a many built in instrument sounds and effects This lets you For more about the names of enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles Tones take a look at the Tone The built in sounds are called Tones The sounds are organized into six tone List p 165 groups which are assigned to the Tone buttons I 491deu5 900 oo o 6 1 Press
275. ttings touch Exit Return to the Song Edit screen 126 Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Songs B Modifying the Tone Changes in Changing the Beat in the Middle a Song PC Edit of a Song Beat Map In some songs the instrument sound changes during the f You can create songs that have beat changes during the course of the song that is the Tone changes in the middle of course of the song a Part In such songs an instruction to switch the Tone is inserted at the place where you want the sound to change You can t change a song s beat once it s been recorded Before This instruction is called a Program Change PC and recording the performance determine the beat to be used actions such as deleting program changes or changing the 1 Press the Menu button selected Tone by them are called PC editing The Menu screen appears tis not possible to insert a program change into a measure or 2 Touch Beat Map beat that does not contain a program change A screen like the one shown below appears AtStep 3 of Selecting the editing function p 121 select PC Edit A screen like the one shown below appears Eum Pc Edit Part 6 SSE Measure 3 Use lt lt lt gt lt PP gt in the screen or the lt lt Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move to the measure whose beat you want to change Th bera ars in the top right area of
276. u can connect an electronic percussion device or other MIDI instrument to the KF 7 s MIDI In connector for ensemble playing Making the MIDI settings for the instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy The sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KF 7 s speaker 1 Switch to the Basic screen or press the One Touch Program Piano button 2 Touch Functions 3 Touch MIDI Ensemble A screen like the following appears Normal Connect drum pads atm Connect keyboards 4 Select the method for using the MIDI In connector Displayed Meaning Normal setting Make changes in Tone and Normal orma other settings from the connected device Select this when you have percussion pads such as Roland s SPD 20 Total Percussion Pad connected to the KF 7 s MIDI In con nector You do not need to make any MIDI settings on the KF 7 Select pad Tones and make other settings from the connected pads for further details refer to the Owner s Manual provided with the pads Pad Select this when you have a keyboard such as a Roland A 37 or AX 7 MIDI Keyboard Controller connected to the KF 7 s MIDI In connector You can select tones for the con nected keyboard from the KF 7 No MIDI Keyboard settings need be made on the KF 7 5 When Keyboard is selected in Step 4 above use a to select the Tone The connected keyboard
277. uch lt Execute gt The accompaniment you ve composed is registered at 0 New Song When storage of the data is complete return to the Menu screen Now press the W Play Stop button and try playing the melody along with the accompaniment you created Songs you ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the power If you do not want to delete the song save it to a floppy disk or to user memory Refer to Saving Songs p 101 Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer Change the accompaniment arrangements Move the cursor Music Style oo00 000000 O Trad Orchestrator Kids Pop Ballad Oldies BigBand Latin Rock Acoustic County Swing Gospel Performance Pane Intro Start fo Variation To Original Ending stop Basic Advanced1 Advanced2 Full Select the accompaniment pattern Division 1 Use the buttons or the dial to move the cursor to the input position Usethe 44 Bwd and gt gt Fwd buttons to move the cursor one measure at a time 2 Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment pattern and arrangement Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment press the keys to specify a chord and press a button to select the accompaniment pattern p 57 You can change the Style Orchestrator with the Performance Pads p 58 3 Touch Ins once to insert one measure before the measure where the cursor is currently pos
278. uch Setting 2 tee eee ee 142 Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads Pedal Setting User Functions sess 143 Changing the Bend Range Pedal Setting 145 Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified Arranger Config sssssssssssseeeeeneenenreneteen 145 Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure 146 Changing the Settings for the Count In and Countdown 146 Settings for the Count In sse 146 Settings for the Countdown ssssssssssseee 147 Other Settings m d Rn 147 Proe d re canne n tede eise ids 147 Changing Standard Pitch Master Tune 148 Changing the Language Language sss 148 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On Opening Message sas sepasis sinang nii iiaii 148 Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KF 7 User Image Display 149 Turning Off the Beat Indicator Beat Indicator 150 Remembering theSettings Even When the Power is Turned Off Memory Backup ssas aradan anaaa na naga een an aaa ed nean an 150 Restoring the Factory Settings Factory Reset 150 Calibrating the Touch Screen Touch Screen Formatting the User Memoty Automatically Starting the Quick Tour Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance Panel Eock eene date aee PANA eee 152 Contents Chapter 9
279. units of beats rather than measures Refer to Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure p 146 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Playback from a Marker location 1 Atthe marker screen touch the measure number of the marker you want to go to J141 Sonate No 15 Pr ge Repeat Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set With the song playing back playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker B on the Marker screen B Erasing a Marker 1 Touch Clear for the marker you want to erase e gt ij Uu Then marker disappears and the on screen uap changes to lt gt B Moving a Marker You can move a marker that has been placed in a song You can also move the section of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back without changing the number of measures of marked for the marker to be moved E EM EM P sp When you touch the marker is moved to a previous part of the song When you touch LD the marker is moved to a later part of the song 83 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Moving Markers A and B without changing the interval between them in the middle of the screen 1 a On the Marker screen touch For example if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure and Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure when you touch KI
280. uou sure 4 a Touch OK The selected song is registered to Favorites Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the Song Selection screen 68 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions B Removing Songs from Favorites This deletes registered songs for Favorites 1 Inthe Song Selection screen select Favorites for the genre O Annie Laurie 1 Annie Laurie 2 Touch the name of the song to be deleted 3 a Touch Del g 1e3deu5 A screen like the one shown below appears OK to delete file fire uou sure 4 a Touch OK The song is deleted 69 m g Q lt s Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Displaying the Score The KF 7 can display scores not only for the internal songs but for music files and performances recorded with the KF 7 This is very convenient for performing while reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded When you play back a music file with lyrics the lyrics appear on screen Selecting the song When playing back songs on floppy disks first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive 1 Press the Select Listen to a Song button to select a song For details refer to Playing a Song p 65 2 Press the Score Display button The Score screen appears Description Displays an enla
281. urce 5 Touch Disk to select the set of User Programs you want to copy When All is selected all of the sets of User Programs on the disk are copied to user memory Specifying the copy destination 6 Touch User 4 to select the copy destination for the set of User Programs If a User Program name is displayed already a User Program saved to that number is already If you select a number with User Programs data and then copy data to that number the previously saved User Programs are deleted If you do not want to delete the saved User Programs select a number in the save destination column for which no name is displayed 7 Touch lt Execute gt The set of User Programs on the disk is saved to user memory Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk drive while the operation is in progress Doing so will damage the KF 7 s internal memory making it unusable B Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to Disks You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks In this case in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4 above touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the arrow to point up This sets the KF 7 to copy the User Program set in the user memory to the floppy disk The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying sets of User Program set from disks to user memory e 2 ij in ui
282. urchase the optional pedal DP 2 DP 6 please contact the dealer where you purchased the keyboard Turning the Power On and Off Be sure to follow the steps below when turning the power on or off By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Turning On the Power 1 Before you switch on the power turn the volume down all the way by rotating the Volume knob Volume 2 Press the Power switch on the back of the unit After a few seconds the unit becomes operable and playing the keyboard produces sound Adjust the volume at appropriate levels Rear panel Lower position ON This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Turning Off the Power 1 Before switching the power off turn the volume all the way down by rotating the Volume knob 2 Press the Power switch on the back of the unit The power is switched off Rear panel Upper position JM OFF Use Yana PSB 3U aptor only 17 m y A 9 lt nOA 2J0Jog gt 2 o o Lo E Before You Start Playing Adjusting the Sound s Volume and Brilliance Turn the Volume knob to adjust the overall volume Turn the Brilliance knob to adjust the brightness of the sound Volume Brilliance cO O Mello
283. ute Conga EE High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 High Conga 2 64 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 Low Conga 2 65 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 EJ Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 Low Timbale 2 67 High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo High Agogo EEE Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo Low Agogo 69 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 Shaker 3 _ Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 Short Hi Whistle EXC2 C5l72 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 Long Low Whistle EXC2 EE Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 Short Guiro EXC3 74 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 Long Guiro EXC3 EA caves Claves Claves Claves 76 High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block High Wood Block 77 Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block Low Wood Block EE Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 Mute Cuica EXC4 79 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 Open Cuica EXC4 E Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 Mute Triangle EXC5 81 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 m 2 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Rs Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell cels4 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree EJ Castanets Castanets Castanets Castanets 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 WE Open Surdo EXC6
284. ute Triangle EXC5 81 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 Open Triangle EXC5 LEM Shaker Shaker Shaker ES Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Jingle Bell v cel84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree g EE Castanets Castanets Castanets E 86 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 Mute Surdo EXC6 o E Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 Open Surdo EXC6 amp 88 Applause 170 No sound EXC will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number SFX Set 1 SFX Vox Set 24 NG KA o LEM Uno 23 I Dos Tres M oc Quatro 26 One LEM Two 28 Three T Four PEN Female Yodel 81 Female Yodel 32 Female Yodel 33 Female Yodel HE Female Yodel 3S5 J Female Yodel Female Yodel o gt Female Yodel 38 Female Yodel E oha Female Yodel 40 Slap Female Yodel p Scratch Push EXC7 Female Yodel EZ Scratch Pull EXC7 Male Yode 43 Sticks Male Yodel E Square Click Male Yode 45 Metronome Click Male Yodel EG Metronome Bell Male Yode 47 Guitar sliding Finger Male Yode C348 Guitar cutting noise up Male Yodel a 49 Guitar cutting noise down Male Yodel 50 String slap of double bass Male Yodel WEE Fl Key Click Male Yode 52 Laughing Male Yode 53 Screaming Male Yodel E Punch Boys Amen 55 Heart Beat Boys Amen E Footsteps Boys Amen 57
285. utton Use this button to select internal songs or songs from floppy disk p 65 Song Stylist button Music Assistant button Score Display button Displays scores p 70 You can use the practice function p 74 Session Partner button Select Various Tones button Touch Screen This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching the screen p 19 Contrast knob Adjusts the contrast of the screen p 19 Dial Use this to change on screen values buttons Allow you to change on screen values One Touch Program button Piano button Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance p 20 Arranger button Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic accompaniment p 47 Melody Intelligence Button Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard p 60 Tone buttons Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard p 21 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 You can select functions for playing back recording or editing a song p 87 p 113 p 130 Track buttons Used to play back or record each track of a song p 81 p 96 a Reset button Resets the song playback start location to the beginning of the song gt Play Stop button Starts and stops playback or recording a song Rec button When pressed this button places the instrument in recording standby p 91 p 113 lt lt
286. utton to change the Tone while this screen is displayed When selecting Rhythm Part you can touch Drum Set to select the drum set or effect sound Finishing the settings 4 Touch Exit The Style Composer screen appears 132 for each parameter to change the value B Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself Style Converter You can take a song you ve composed yourself and extract the portions you need to create your own original Style When you re composing a song there s no need to specify all the chords You can specify some of the chords and the KF 7 automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the style This function is called the Style Converter Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord and a Manual mode in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chords major minor and seventh chords When creating a song in order to create an music style it s good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style Style Arrangements A Music Style is made up of five performance parts Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 and Accompaniment 3 A song progresses in predictable a sequence such as intro melody A melody B bridge and ending With the KF 7 such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states We call these six parts of a song Di
287. varies according to the drum set Take a look at the Drum 3 a Touch lt Exit gt several times Set List p 167 and SFX Set List p 171 This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen 22 Chapter 1 Performance B Using Keywords to Search for Tones Tone Search You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical style You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name 1 a Press any Tone button The tone selection screen appears 2 a Touch Search The following Tone search screen appears 2 Condition Search screen Name Search screen d gt Tone Search gt Tone Search sS Specifu initial letter of keuvord to search then touch Search Select the tupe of musical instrument and musical genre Category i Sear Touch here to switch th reens oe SNS Eee SSE SCEEEHS In condition search tones Searching by Conditions satisfying all of the selected search criteria are sought 3 Touch Category or Genre then use the buttons and the dial to select the search conditions 4 a Touch Search The search results appear in the display Touch the tone name to select the tone Touch Exit to return to the tone search screen Searching by Tone Name 3 Touch By Name Touch By Key to go to the condition search screen 4 Decide whic
288. ve the data with MT set as the Tone compatibility format Display Explanation The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with KF p richness of expression using the KF 7 s special Tones Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players other than the KF 7 MT You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP G R se ries KR series and KF series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices Note When data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this instrument some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the data was recorded may be altered Even with data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format an exact reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players e 2 5 n Save You can only save songs in one 9 Touch Save or As SMEs to start saving The resulting file format will be different depending on whether Save or As format on a single floppy disk SMF gt is chosen as described below Never turn off the power Display Explanation while the saving operation is Saves the song in KF 7 format You can listen to songs saved in in progress Doing so will S this format on the Roland HP G R series KR series and KF series damage the KF 7 s i
289. ves 67 Song Selection screen eee 65 Style Composer screen sesseseeeeee 131 Style Converter screen essen 133 188 Style Search screen essent 52 Style Selection Screen dee etes 50 FONE Search Screen aces eer E ee o s 23 Tone selection screen esee 21 TranspOse Screet iiri janaka pengangen 85 User Program screen sees 107 Vocal Effects screen ss sanesa eea an aana anengen aan 33 Write User Program screen sese 107 Search MusicStyle nu ee tete 52 SONG arasa aka NAAS E eR Eam nie ad 67 PONG odit at e e e aet ede bdbre salas tune 23 Select Various Tones button sss QS 14 Select Listen to a Song button eee QS 6 65 Session Partner button sene QS 18 SEX zug it d ERR Ene QS 5 QS 14 SEX Set List 5i ande eet E oe ose 171 SME34 x n ond Sot cede i ete I an Bitte nec baing a abaan 181 SMF Music files 5 eet eetee etri eee exces eite ere eiie ago 181 Solo anie aene ede EC Pipe eM iets 114 Song Information nonet pr neces 66 Song Number us a r E ESE air ian 66 SONGS sce had anesieitemii ont et edes QS 5 Song Search doe eee eter der te e rei EI rna 67 Song Stylist button ette rte QS 16 Sound Bffects arsaa aka aaa a a GA NER tede ee eret ee no 22 Sound Generator eee erede tee etse 181 Split te Aet ER eed 62 Split Point ih abit a naa ag aa kag a iste di venite 142 Spl
290. visions Division Performance division Intro The intro is played at the start of a song play 5 Endin This is played at the end of a song g play 5 Original This is a basic accompaniment pattern g P P Variation This is a developmental accompaniment pattern It is a variation on an Original Fill In To This is a one measure phrase inserted at a Variation juncture where the mood changes It is used to make a song more lively Fill In To This is a one measure phrase inserted at a Oriainal juncture where the mood changes It is used 9 to makeasong more sedate 5 You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions You can also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the Divisions Chapter 7 Creating Music Styles O Creating Styles in Auto Mode Points to note when creating songs Use one of the major minor or diminished seventh chords to create the song We recommend using diminished seventh chords to compose the song It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16 track sequencer Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp 1 2 3 D 10 2 7 8 9 IET CountOnBlues 4 4 M 10 Conv Mode Chord Root jr JI Division intro Chord Tupe Major Fo gt When using parts other than Part 2 7 8 9 and D refer to
291. w Bright Connecting Headphones The unit s speakers will go silent when you plug in headphones This makes it convenient for playing at night or at other times when you do not want to disturb others 1 Plug the headphones into the Phones jack at the front on the left side of the piano The sound from the built in speakers stops Now sound is heard only through the headphones 2 Use the Volume knob on the KF 7 to adjust the volume of the headphones Use Stereo headphones Some Notes on Using Headphones To prevent damage to the cord handle the headphones only by the headset or the plug The headphones may be damaged if the volume is too high when they are plugged in Lower the volume on the KF 7 before plugging in the headphones To prevent possible auditory damage loss of hearing or damage to the headphones the headphones should not be used at an excessively high volume Use the headphones at a moderate volume level 18 Connecting a Microphone You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack and enjoy karaoke with the KF 7 l Connecta microphone to the Mic In jack on the back of the instrument 2 Rotate the Mic Volume knob next to the Mic In jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone gt You can use a microphone sold separately When purchasing a microphone please consult the vendor where you bought the KF 7 Some Notes on Using a
292. ys Lower Left hand Tone Layer Layer Tone Upper Right hand Tone 2 a Touch each slider a 2 to adjust the volume balance You can also make these adjustments by touching the adjustment sliders and then using the buttons or the dial Touch lt Exit gt to go back to the previous screen 64 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions Playing a Song Now let s try practicing while playing back internal songs commercial music files and songs saved to floppy disks You can use rewind or fast forward to go to any desired measure and play back from that point Oz Record Playback buttons Selecting the song When playing back songs on floppy disks first insert the floppy disk in the disk NEM drive If the floppy disk is being used for the first time refer to p 6 e 2 ij 1 a Press the Select Listen to a Song button The following Genre Selection screen appears Heg a E oe Classical Lounge 12sonos When you touch the genre for the song you want to play the screen changes When selecting a song from a disk touch Disk The following Song Selection screen appears P 17 3 a O Annie Laurie 3 AmazingGrace Chord 4 Ave Maria 2 Londonderry 5 Clock 65 Chapter 3 Song Playback and Practice Functions songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in When you touch l

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sharkoon Vaya II Value  AQUADISC G4  Table of Contents - LaCieStorage.com  Integral TM13 ISDN Telephone  お知らせ掲示板        Samsung GT-C3060 Kasutusjuhend  MCU series User`s manual - PLANET Technology Corporation.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file